FF230001
Owner’s Manual
BL00005235-201
EN
ii
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents be-
fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/
The website can be accessed not only from
your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on rmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
iii
P
Chapter Index
1 Before You Begin 1
2 First Steps 39
3 Basic Photography and Playback 59
4 Movie Recording and Playback 67
5 Taking Photographs 75
6 The Shooting Menus 125
7 Playback and the Playback Menu 213
8 Network/USB Setting Menus 241
9 The Setup Menus 331
10 Shortcuts 375
11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393
12 Technical Notes 419
Menu List
iv
iv
Menu List
Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.
Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
N
See page 125 for details.
Photo Menus
N
Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
1⁄4
1⁄4
IMAGE SIZE 126
IMAGE QUALITY 127
RAW RECORDING 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF 129
FILM SIMULATION 130
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 132
GRAIN EFFECT 132
COLOR CHROME EFFECT 133
2⁄4
2⁄4
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 133
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT 133
DYNAMIC RANGE 134
D RANGE PRIORITY 135
WHITE BALANCE 136
TONE CURVE 140
COLOR 140
SHARPNESS 140
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
3⁄4
3⁄4
HIGH ISO NR 140
CLARITY 141
LONG EXPOSURE NR 141
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER 141
COLOR SPACE 141
xF PIXEL MAPPING
142
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 142
4⁄4
4⁄4
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
143
v
Menu List
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FOCUS AREA 146
AF MODE 146
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING 146
AF MODE ALL SETTING 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 150
AF POINT DISPLAY
yz
151
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
151
2⁄3
2⁄3
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 151
PRE-AF 152
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING 155
AF+MF 157
MF ASSIST 158
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &
FOCUS RING
158
3⁄3
3⁄3
FOCUS CHECK 159
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 159
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
160
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE 162
A SHOOTING SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
SELF-TIMER 164
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING 165
SELF-TIMER LAMP 165
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 166
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
168
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE 168
AE BKT SETTING 169
FILM SIMULATION BKT 169
2⁄3
2⁄3
FOCUS BKT SETTING 169
PHOTOMETRY 169
SHUTTER TYPE 170
FLICKER REDUCTION 171
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 171
ISO 171
IS MODE 172
35mm FORMAT MODE 172
3⁄3
3⁄3
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
173
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
173
F FLASH SETTING
P
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING 174
RED EYE REMOVAL 174
TTL-LOCK MODE 175
LED LIGHT SETTING 175
COMMANDER SETTING 176
CH SETTING 176
vi
Menu List
Movie Menus
N
Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
B MOVIE SETTING
P
1⁄4
1⁄4
MOVIE SETTING LIST 177
IMAGE FORMAT 177
MOVIE MODE 178
HIGH SPEED REC
179
F SELF-TIMER
180
MEDIA REC SETTING
181
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
184
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
185
2⁄4
2⁄4
F-Log/HLG RECORDING 186
DATA LEVEL SETTING 187
F PHOTOMETRY
187
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
187
F IS MODE
188
F IS MODE BOOST
188
F ISO
189
ZEBRA SETTING 189
3⁄4
3⁄4
ZEBRA LEVEL 189
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
191
TALLY LIGHT 192
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM
SETTING
193
4⁄4
4⁄4
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
193
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
F FILM SIMULATION
194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
194
F DYNAMIC RANGE
195
F WHITE BALANCE
195
F TONE CURVE
195
F COLOR
195
F SHARPNESS
196
F HIGH ISO NR
196
2⁄2
2⁄2
INTERFRAME NR
196
xF PIXEL MAPPING
196
F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY
197
F
PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
197
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
197
vii
Menu List
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
F FOCUS AREA
198
F AF MODE
198
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
199
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
199
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
200
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
200
F SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING
200
F AF+MF
201
2⁄2
2⁄2
F MF ASSIST
201
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &
FOCUS RING
201
F FOCUS CHECK
202
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
202
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
202
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
202
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
203
FOCUS CHECK LOCK 204
P AUDIO SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 205
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUST-
MENT
205
MIC JACK SETTING 206
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
206
WIND FILTER 206
LOW CUT FILTER 207
HEADPHONES VOLUME 207
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 207
2⁄2
2⁄2 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING 208
Q TIME CODE SETTING
P
TIME CODE DISPLAY 209
START TIME SETTING 209
COUNT UP SETTING 210
DROP FRAME
210
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT 211
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
211
viii
Menu List
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N
See page 220 for details.
C PLAY BACK MENU
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
SWITCH SLOT 220
RAW CONVERSION 221
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION 223
ERASE 224
SIMULTANEOUSDELETE 226
CROP 226
RESIZE 227
PROTECT 228
C PLAY BACK MENU
P
2⁄3
2⁄3
IMAGE ROTATE 229
VOICE MEMO SETTING 230
RATING 231
COPY 232
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 233
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
235
DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK 235
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 236
3⁄3
3⁄3
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 238
instax PRINTER PRINT 239
DISP ASPECT 240
ix
Menu List
Menu List
Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N
See page 331 for details.
D USER SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
FORMAT 332
b AREA SETTING
333
DATE/TIME 333
TIME DIFFERENCE 334
Q a
335
x MY MENU SETTING
335
F MY MENU SETTING
335
SENSOR CLEANING 336
2⁄2
2⁄2
BATTERY AGE 336
RESET 337
REGULATORY 337
D SOUND SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
AF BEEP VOL. 338
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 338
OPERATION VOL. 339
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
VOLUME
339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
SOUND
340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
340
2⁄2
2⁄2
PLAYBACK VOLUME 341
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 341
x
Menu List
D SCREEN SETTING
P
1⁄4
1⁄4
VIEW MODE SETTING 342
EVF BRIGHTNESS 342
EVF COLOR 342
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 343
LCD BRIGHTNESS 344
LCD COLOR 344
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 344
IMAGE DISP. 345
2⁄4
2⁄4
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 345
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 346
NATURAL LIVE VIEW 346
F-Log VIEW ASSIST 347
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING 347
FRAMING GUIDELINE 347
AUTOROTATE PB 348
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION 348
3⁄4
3⁄4
FOCUS SCALE UNITS 348
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING 349
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION 349
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 349
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 350
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 351
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 352
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 352
D SCREEN SETTING
P
4⁄4
4⁄4
LOCATION INFO 353
SUB MONITOR SETTING 353
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
356
x
Q MENU BACKGROUND
356
F
Q MENU BACKGROUND
356
xi
Menu List
Menu List
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FOCUS LEVER SETTING 357
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
357
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
357
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING 358
COMMAND DIAL SETTING 358
o S.S. OPERATION
359
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION 359
SHUTTER AF 359
2⁄3
2⁄3
SHUTTER AE 360
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS 360
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD 360
FOCUS RING 361
FOCUS RING OPERATION 361
AE/AF-LOCK MODE 361
AWB-LOCK MODE 362
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING 362
3⁄3
3⁄3
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
363
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING 364
LOCK 365
D POWER MANAGEMENT
P
AUTO POWER OFF 366
PERFORMANCE 367
SHOOTING STAND BY MODE 368
AUTO POWER SAVE 368
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. 368
D SAVE DATA SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
FRAME NO. 369
EDIT FILE NAME 370
x CARD SLOT SETTING
370
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
370
SELECT FOLDER 371
COPYRIGHT INFO 371
DEFAULT CAPTION 372
IPTC 372
2⁄2
2⁄2 GEOTAGGING 373
xii
Menu List
The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
I NETWORK/USB SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING 313
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING 318
AIRPLANE MODE 319
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 320
instax PRINTER CONNECTION
SETTING
323
Frame.io Camera to Cloud 323
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING 326
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM
SETTING
328
2⁄2
2⁄2
INFORMATION 329
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING 329
xiii
P
Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................... ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List ...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu ......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ........................................................................xii
Supplied Accessories ..................................................................................xxvii
About This Manual ......................................................................................xxviii
Symbols and Conventions .................................................................................xxviii
Terminology ................................................................................................................xxviii
1
Before You Begin 1
Before You Begin 1
Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) .....................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................6
The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................7
The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch ...............................................................................8
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................8
The Command Dials .......................................................................................................9
The Indicator Lamp ......................................................................................................10
The LCD Monitor ...........................................................................................................11
The View nder ..................................................................................................12
Attaching the View nder ......................................................................................... 13
The Eye Cup ......................................................................................................................14
Focusing the View nder ........................................................................................... 15
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 16
The Electronic View nder ........................................................................................ 16
The LCD Monitor ...........................................................................................................18
Choosing a Display Mode ........................................................................................20
Adjusting Display Brightness .................................................................................22
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 22
The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................... 22
xiv
The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 24
Customizing the Standard Display .....................................................................25
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................27
The Secondary LCD Monitor ..................................................................................28
Using the Menus ..............................................................................................32
The Menus ......................................................................................................................... 32
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 33
Touch Screen Mode .........................................................................................34
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 34
Playback Touch Controls ...........................................................................................38
2
First Steps 39
First Steps 39
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 40
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 41
Inserting the Battery .......................................................................................43
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 45
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................47
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 48
Using an external SSD in place of a memory card ...................................49
Charging the Battery ......................................................................................50
Turning the Camera On and O .................................................................54
Checking the Battery Level ...........................................................................55
Basic Setup .........................................................................................................56
Choosing a Di erent Language ........................................................................... 58
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 58
3
Basic Photography and Playback 59
Basic Photography and Playback 59
Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 60
Viewing Pictures ...............................................................................................63
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 64
Deleting Pictures ..............................................................................................66
4
Movie Recording and Playback 67
Movie Recording and Playback 67
Recording Movies ............................................................................................68
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 72
Viewing Movies .................................................................................................73
xv
Table of Contents
5
Taking Photographs 75
Taking Photographs 75
P, S, A, and M Modes ........................................................................................ 76
Mode P: Program AE ...................................................................................................76
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE.....................................................................................78
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................80
Mode M: Manual Exposure .....................................................................................82
Custom Modes ............................................................................................................... 86
Autofocus ............................................................................................................92
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 93
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ..............................................................................95
Focus-Point Selection .................................................................................................97
Manual Focus ...................................................................................................101
Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 103
Sensitivity ..........................................................................................................106
AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 107
Metering ............................................................................................................108
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................109
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................110
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 111
Bracketing .........................................................................................................112
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 113
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 113
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 114
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................117
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................119
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot ....................................................................................121
6
The Shooting Menus 125
The Shooting Menus 125
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF ...................................................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .................................................................................. 132
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132
xvi
COLOR CHROME EFFECT ....................................................................................... 133
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 133
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 133
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 134
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 135
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 136
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 140
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 140
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 140
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 140
CLARIT Y ............................................................................................................................ 141
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 141
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 141
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 141
xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 142
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................... 142
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 143
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................146
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 146
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 146
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING ....................................................................................... 146
AF MODE ALL SETTING .......................................................................................... 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 150
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 151
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 151
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ................................................................................ 151
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 152
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 155
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 157
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 158
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING .......................................................... 158
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 159
xvii
Table of Contents
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA .............................................................. 159
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................... 160
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 162
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) ................................................164
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 164
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING .................................................................................... 165
SELF-TIMER LAMP ....................................................................................................... 165
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 166
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING ........................ 168
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 168
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 169
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 169
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 169
PHOTOME TRY ............................................................................................................... 169
SHUTTER TYPE .............................................................................................................. 170
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 171
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 171
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 171
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 172
35mm FORMAT MODE ........................................................................................... 172
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 173
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 173
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................174
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 174
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 174
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 175
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 175
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 176
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 176
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................177
MOVIE SETTING LIST ................................................................................................. 177
IMAGE FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 177
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 178
xviii
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 179
F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 180
MEDIA REC SETTING ................................................................................................. 181
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING ......................................................................................... 184
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 185
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 186
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 187
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 187
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING .............................................................................. 187
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 188
F IS MODE BOOST ................................................................................................... 188
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 189
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 189
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 189
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE ................................................................................ 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 191
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 192
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................... 193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 193
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 193
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................194
F FILM SIMULATION ............................................................................................... 194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 194
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 195
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 195
F TONE CUR VE .......................................................................................................... 195
F COLOR ........................................................................................................................ 195
F SHARPNESS ............................................................................................................. 196
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 196
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 196
xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 196
F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY ................................................................................... 197
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 197
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 197
xix
Table of Contents
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................198
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 198
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 198
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 199
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 199
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 200
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 200
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 200
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 201
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 201
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING ................................................... 201
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 202
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 202
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................... 202
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 202
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 203
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 204
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................205
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ............................................................... 205
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT .............................................................. 205
MIC JACK SETTING ..................................................................................................... 206
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 206
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 206
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 207
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 207
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ............................................................................................ 207
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING ................................................................................. 208
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) ................................................209
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 209
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 209
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 210
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 210
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 211
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING .................................................................................. 211
xx
7
Playback and the Playback Menu 213
Playback and the Playback Menu 213
The Playback Display ....................................................................................214
The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................ 216
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................218
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 219
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 219
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................220
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 220
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 221
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 223
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 224
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 226
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 226
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 227
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 228
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 229
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 230
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 231
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 232
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE .............................................................. 233
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ................................................................ 235
DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK ........................................................................ 235
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 236
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 238
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 239
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 240
8
Network/USB Setting Menus 241
Network/USB Setting Menus 241
Overview ...........................................................................................................242
Supported Features .................................................................................................. 242
Connection Setting Pro les ................................................................................. 246
xxi
Table of Contents
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) ..............................................247
Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 247
Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 247
Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 249
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................252
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 252
Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 255
Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................257
instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................258
Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 258
Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 259
Tethered Photography .................................................................................260
Tethered Photography via USB.......................................................................... 260
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN ..................................................... 262
Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet) ................................... 267
Uploading Files to Frame.io ........................................................................270
Connecting via Wireless LAN .............................................................................. 270
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) ........................................................... 272
Uploading Items to Frame.io .............................................................................. 275
Uploading Files via FTP ................................................................................278
Connecting to FTP Servers ................................................................................... 278
Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers ................................ 285
Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers .................................................................. 288
RAW Processing ..............................................................................................291
Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................292
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser ................................293
Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser ................................... 293
Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet .................... 303
The Remote Recording Display ......................................................................... 306
Recording Movies Remotely ............................................................................... 310
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................... 310
Saving and Loading Camera Settings ........................................................... 311
xxii
Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................313
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING ............................................................ 313
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING ........................................................................ 318
AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 319
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 320
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING ........................................................ 323
Frame.io Camera to Cloud .................................................................................... 323
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING ......................................................................................... 326
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 328
INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 329
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING ........................................................................ 329
9
The Setup Menus 331
The Setup Menus 331
USER SETTING .................................................................................................332
FORMAT ............................................................................................................................ 332
b AREA SETTING ..................................................................................................... 333
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 333
TIME DIFFERENCE ....................................................................................................... 334
Qa ............................................................................................................... 335
x MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 335
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 335
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 336
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 336
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 337
REGULATORY ................................................................................................................. 337
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................338
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 338
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 338
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 339
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 340
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 341
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 341
xxiii
Table of Contents
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................342
VIEW MODE SETTING ............................................................................................... 342
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 342
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 342
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................... 343
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 344
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 344
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................... 344
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 345
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 345
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 346
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 346
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 347
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 347
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 347
AUTOROTATE PB .......................................................................................................... 348
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION ................................................................................ 348
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 348
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 349
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION ................................................................ 349
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 349
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 350
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 351
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 352
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. ......................................................................... 352
LOCATION INFO ........................................................................................................... 353
SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 353
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 356
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ................................................................................357
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 357
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 358
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 358
xxiv
o S.S. OPERATION ................................................................................................... 359
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION .............................................................................. 359
SHUTTER AF ................................................................................................................... 359
SHUTTER AE ................................................................................................................... 360
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 360
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD ......................................................................................... 360
FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................. 361
FOCUS RING OPERATION ...................................................................................... 361
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 361
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 362
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING ........................................................................ 362
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 363
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 364
LOCK ................................................................................................................................... 365
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................366
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 366
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 367
SHOOTING STAND BY MODE .............................................................................. 368
AUTO POWER SAVE ................................................................................................... 368
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 368
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................369
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 369
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 370
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 370
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 370
SELECT FOLDER ........................................................................................................... 371
COPYRIGHT INFO ........................................................................................................ 371
DEFAULT CAPTION ..................................................................................................... 372
IPTC ..................................................................................................................................... 372
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 373
xxv
Table of Contents
10
Shortcuts 375
Shortcuts 375
Shortcut Options ............................................................................................376
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................377
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 377
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................379
The Quick Menu Display ........................................................................................ 379
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 381
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 382
Function Controls...........................................................................................385
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 385
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 390
11
Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393
Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393
Lenses .................................................................................................................394
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 394
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 395
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 395
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 395
Aperture Rings ............................................................................................................. 396
T/S Lenses ....................................................................................................................... 396
View nder Tilt Adapters ..............................................................................397
Attaching the EVF-TL1............................................................................................. 398
Using the EVF-TL1 ...................................................................................................... 399
External Flash Units .......................................................................................400
Flash Settings ................................................................................................................ 401
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 402
SHOE MOUNT FLASH ............................................................................................... 403
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 406
Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................410
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 411
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 413
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 415
Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................416
Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 416
Using the Fan ................................................................................................................ 418
xxvi
Table of Contents
12
Technical Notes 419
Technical Notes 419
Accessories from Fuji lm .............................................................................420
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera ...............................423
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 423
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX ..................................... 423
Capture One Express for Fuji lm ...................................................................... 424
Capture One for Fuji lm ........................................................................................ 424
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 424
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 424
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 425
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 425
Frame.io Camera to Cloud .................................................................................... 425
For Your Safety ................................................................................................426
Product Care ....................................................................................................437
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................438
Firmware Updates ..........................................................................................439
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 439
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................440
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................452
Errors ...................................................................................................................457
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................460
Speci cations ..................................................................................................461
xxvii
Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
•
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
O
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be
sure to charge the battery before use (P 50).
•
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
•
Plug adapter
•
Interchangeable electronic view nder EVF-GFX3
•
USB cable (approx. 0.6m/2ft.)
•
Body cap (comes attached to camera)
•
Shoulder strap
•
Cable protector
•
Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
•
Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)
•
Vertical battery grip connector cover (comes attached to
camera)
•
Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera)
O
The EVF-GFX3 is for the GFX100 II only.
N
•
The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
•
For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 423).
xxviii
About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM GFX100 II
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O
Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
N
Additional information that may be helpful when using the
product.
P
Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simpli ed,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory
cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “mem-
ory cards”. The electronic view nder may be referred to as the
“EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets
are referred to as “smartphones”.
1
Before You Begin
2
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
A
Secondary monitor backlight button .......31
B
Fn4 button ..................................................... 385
C
Secondary LCD monitor................................28
D
Microphone ......................................................68
E
Hot shoe .........................................................401
F
Dial lock release .......................................60, 68
G
Mode dial ............................................................7
H
STILL/MOVIE mode switch
.............................................................. 8, 60, 68
I
Strap eyelet .......................................................40
J
LAN connector cover
K
Connector cover
L
AF-assist illuminator...................................152
Self-timer lamp ............................................164
Tally light ........................................................192
M
Sync terminal ................................................ 402
N
Lens signal contacts
O
Lens release button ........................................41
P
Fn6 button ..................................................... 385
Q
Fn5 button ..................................................... 385
R
Front command dial ...............................9, 358
S
ON/OFF switch .................................................54
T
Shutter button .................................................62
U
Fn1 button ..................................................... 385
V
Fn2 button ..................................................... 385
W
Fn3 button ..................................................... 385
X
Hot shoe cover .............................................. 401
Y
Body cap ............................................................41
Z
LAN connector
a
Microphone/remote release connector
(⌀3.5mm) ...............................................71, 85
b
HDMI connector (Type A) .............................64
c
USB connector (Type-C) ...............................50
d
Hole to screw USB cable
e
Hole to screw cable protector
O
a
Use of an optional RR-100 remote release requires a third-party
adapter to convert the three-pin, ⌀2.5mm connector to a three-
pin, ⌀3.5 mm connector.
3
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
f
DRIVE button ......................................................8
g
b (delete) button ...........................................66
h
Focus mode selector ......................................93
i
AFON button .........................................111, 385
j
Rear command dial .......................9, 218, 358
k
Q (quick menu) button ...............................379
l
Indicator lamp ....................................... 10, 192
Tally light ........................................................192
m
Headphone jack cover
n
Memory card slot cover latch ......................45
o
Memory card slot cover (detachable)
.....................................................................6, 45
p
Battery-chamber cover latch ......................43
q
Hole to hook Vertical Battery Grip
r
Battery-chamber cover .................................43
s
DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 22, 216
t
a (playback) button ...................................63
u
Speaker .................................................... 73, 341
v
MENU/OK button .............................................32
w
AEL (exposure lock) button ..............111, 385
x
Focus stick (focus lever)...................6, 98, 357
y
Tripod mount
z
Vertical battery grip connector cover ....411
0
Tilt lock release ................................................11
1
LCD monitor .......................................11, 18, 20
Touch screen .................................34, 162, 203
2
Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................207
3
Memory card slot1
(for Type B CFexpress cards) ......................45
4
Memory card slot2
(for SD memory cards) ...............................45
4
1
Before You Begin
5
Battery latch ....................................................44
6
Battery chamber .............................................43
7
Cooling fan connector cover ....................416
8
Cooling fan connector ...............................416
9
Hole to screw cooling fan ..........................416
-
Serial number plate..........................................6
^
Vertical battery grip connector ................411
5
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Cable Protector
Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection.
A
Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover
passes through the slot in the protector.
B
Tighten the lock screw.
C
Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown.
6
1
Before You Begin
The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIITID, serial num-
ber, and other important information.
Serial number plate
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable)
The memory card slot cover can be re-
moved by lowering the interior latch. Re-
move the cover for ease of access when
a camera rig is attached or in other sit-
uations that make it di cult to open or
close the cover.
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-
cus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.
N
To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-
ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.
7
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Mode Dial
To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until
the icon for the desired mode aligns with the
index.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
P
P
A
P (PROGRAM AE) Aperture and shutter speed can be ad-
justed using program shift.
76
B
S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE)
A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE)
M (MANUAL)
Select for full control over camera set-
tings, including aperture (M and A)
and/or shutter speed (M and S).
78
80
82
C
C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6
(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6)
Take pictures using previously-stored
settings.
86
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.
8
1
Before You Begin
The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL
to take photographs or to MOVIE to record
movies.
The DRIVE Button
Press the DRIVE button to adjust shooting settings. The options
displayed vary with the position of the STILL/MOVIE mode switch.
•
Pressing the button when STILL is select-
ed displays drive mode options.
Mode
Mode
P
P
B
Single frame
76
J
High-speed burst
117
O
Low-speed burst
117
W
ISO BKT
113
V
WHITE BALANCE BKT
113
BKT Bracketing
114
Mode
Mode
P
P
j
Multiple exposure 119
q
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
ACCURATE COLOR
121
r
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
HIGH RESOLUTION +
ACCURATE COLOR
121
•
Pressing the button when MOVIE is selected displays movie re-
cording options.
Option
Option
Frame size
Aspect ratio
Frame rate
9
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Command Dials
Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial Rear command dial
Rotate
Rotate
•
Select menu tabs or page
through menus
•
Adjust aperture
1, 2
•
View other pictures during
playback
•
Highlight menu items
•
Choose the desired combina-
tion of shutter speed and aper-
ture (program shift)
•
Choose a shutter speed
1, 4
•
Adjust exposure compensation
by rotating the dial while press-
ing the function button to which
EXPO. COMP. is assigned
1
•
Adjust settings in the quick menu
•
Choose the size of the focus frame
•
Zoom in or out in full frame play-
back
•
Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback
Press
Press
•
Switch between aperture and
ISO sensitivity
2
•
Press and hold to choose the op-
tion selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> COMMAND
DIAL SETTING in the D(setup)
menu
•
Zoom in on the active focus point
3
•
Press and hold to choose the
manual focus mode focus display
3
•
Zoom in on the active focus
point during playback
1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
2 If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the aperture ring
must be in the A or C position.
3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.
4 Only if a value other than auto is selected for shutter speed.
N
The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.
10
1
Before You Begin
The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Camera status
Camera status
Glows green Focus locked.
Blinks green Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
Blinks green and
orange
•
Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for con-
fi rmation after being taken with option other than OFF
selected for D SCREEN SETTING> IMAGE DISP. (ad-
ditional pictures can be taken).
•
Camera o : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet.
*
Glows orange
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
this time.
Blinks orange Flash charging; fl ash will not fi re when picture is taken.
Blinks red Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.
N
•
Warnings may also appear in the display.
•
The indicator lamp remains o while your eye is to the view nder.
•
The B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-
cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
11
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-
ier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap ngers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.
N
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
•
Touch photography (P 35)
•
Focus area selection (P 34)
•
Function selection (P 37)
•
Movie optimized control oL (P 36)
•
Playback (P 38)
“Tall” (Portrait) Orientation
The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when
the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
•
Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1.
•
To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in
Figure 2.
Figure 1 Figure 2
12
1
Before You Begin
The View nder
A
Hot shoe .................................................397, 403
B
Viewfi nder lock releases ............................... 13
C
VIEW MODE button ......................................... 20
D
Eye sensor .........................................................21
E
Electronic viewfi nder (EVF) ................... 16, 20
F
Eye cup (lockable) .......................................... 14
G
Diopter adjustment control ........................ 15
H
Serial number plate
I
Connectors ....................................................... 13
J
Hot shoe cover
K
Connector cover
The EVF-TL1
The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel
the view nder left or right ±45° or up or down
between 0° and 90° (P 397).
13
1
Before You Begin
The View nder
Attaching the View nder
Using the view nder makes it easier to
frame your subject accurately. Remove
the hot shoe cover from the camera and
slide the view nder onto the hot shoe,
stopping when it clicks into place.
Removing the View nder
Keeping the lock releases pressed (
A
), press
down on the front of the view nder (
B
) and
slide it o as shown.
14
1
Before You Begin
The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.
15
1
Before You Begin
The View nder
Focusing the View nder
If the indicators displayed in the view nder are blurred, put your
eye to the view nder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.
To focus the view nder:
A
Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B
Rotate the control to adjust view nder focus.
C
Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.
O
Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.
16
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.
O
For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic View nder
2023
.
12.31 12
:
10
N O P
Q R
S T W X
U V
JHI KLM
a
e fY Z
dcb
D
E
F
h
g
i
k
j
l
m
op
n
qrs
ut
x
y
v
w
z
0123
5
4
6
7
8
9
A
C D
E GF
B
C
G
A
Movie format/crop factor ......................... 185
B
IS mode
2
.........................................................172
C
Movie compression .....................................182
D
Focus check ..........................................104, 159
17
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
E
Depth-of-fi eld preview ........................ 81, 103
F
Proxy setting (ProRes only) ........................184
G
35mm format mode ...................................172
H
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403
I
Flash compensation ...................................403
J
Self-timer indicator ..................................... 164
K
Continuous mode ........................................117
L
Shutter type ...................................................170
M
AF+MF indicator
2
.......................................157
N
Bluetooth ON/OFF
O
Wireless connection
P
Ethernet connection
Q
White balance .............................................. 136
R
AWB lock ........................................................362
S
Film simulation ............................................ 130
T
F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186
U
Dynamic range ............................................134
V
D-range priority ...........................................135
W
Bluetooth host ..............................................247
X
AirGlu BT connection ..................................211
Y
Movie mode ...........................................68, 178
Z
High-speed recording indicator .............. 179
a
Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................68
b
Card slot options ................................... 47, 370
c
SSD connection status ..................................49
d
Number of available frames
1
...................460
e
Image size ......................................................126
f
File format ......................................................182
g
Image quality................................................127
h
HEIF format ...................................................129
i
Date and time ..................................56, 58, 333
j
Touch screen mode .............................. 34, 162
k
Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193
l
Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456
m
Control lock
3
.................................................365
n
Boost mode ...................................................367
o
Power supply ....................................................52
p
Histogram .........................................................26
q
Battery level ......................................................55
r
Sensitivity ....................................................... 106
s
Exposure compensation ............................109
t
Aperture ...............................................77, 80, 82
u
Distance indicator
2
..................................... 103
v
Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
w
TTL lock ..................................................175, 389
x
AE lock ....................................................111, 361
y
Metering ......................................................... 108
z
Shooting mode ...............................................76
0
Focus mode
2
....................................................93
1
Focus indicator
2
..............................................94
2
Manual focus indicator
2
.................... 93, 101
3
AF lock ....................................................111, 361
4
Shift amount/rotate amount...................396
5
Time code .......................................................209
6
Microphone input channel ....................... 208
7
Recording level
2
........................................... 205
8
Exposure indicator ................................ 82, 109
9
Virtual horizon .................................................27
A
Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110
B
Location data download status .............. 373
C
Frame.io connection status ......................274
D
Image transfer status ........................247, 313
E
FTP upload progress ...................................278
F
Frame.io upload progress ..........................270
G
Remote recording function .......................293
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
18
1
Before You Begin
The LCD Monitor
A S T a b
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
m
opqt rsux01
yz2345
9
-
^
n
L R
8
c
X
6
7
C D
B
k
l
M N
Y Z
U WV
E
G H
F
I
O P Q
%
&
\
'
$
w v
J K
'
70
A
Movie format/crop factor ......................... 185
B
Bluetooth ON/OFF
C
Wireless connection
D
Ethernet connection
E
Movie compression .....................................182
F
Focus check ..........................................104, 159
G
Depth-of-fi eld preview ........................ 81, 103
H
Proxy setting (ProRes only) ........................184
I
35mm format mode ...................................172
J
Bluetooth host ..............................................247
K
AirGlu BT connection ..................................211
L
Location data download status .............. 373
M
Movie mode ...........................................68, 178
N
High-speed recording indicator .............. 179
O
Image transfer status ........................247, 313
P
FTP upload progress ...................................278
19
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Q
Frame.io upload progress ..........................270
R
Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110
S
Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................68
T
Date and time ..................................56, 58, 333
U
Card slot options ................................... 47, 370
V
SSD connection status ..................................49
W
Number of available frames
1
...................460
X
Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193
Y
Image size ......................................................126
Z
File format ......................................................182
a
Image quality................................................127
b
HEIF format ...................................................129
c
Touch screen mode
3
............................ 34, 162
d
AWB lock ........................................................362
e
White balance .............................................. 136
f
Film simulation ............................................ 130
g
F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186
h
Dynamic range ............................................134
i
D-range priority ...........................................135
j
Movie optimized control
3
............................36
k
Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456
l
Control lock
4
.................................................365
m
Boost mode ...................................................367
n
Power supply ....................................................52
o
Battery level ......................................................55
p
Histogram .........................................................26
q
Sensitivity ....................................................... 106
r
Virtual horizon .................................................27
s
Exposure compensation ............................109
t
Distance indicator
2
..................................... 103
u
Aperture ...............................................77, 80, 82
v
Shift amount/rotate amount...................396
w
Time code .......................................................209
x
Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
y
TTL lock ..................................................175, 389
z
AE lock ....................................................111, 361
0
Metering ......................................................... 108
1
Shooting mode ...............................................76
2
Focus mode
2
....................................................93
3
Focus indicator
2
..............................................94
4
Manual focus indicator
2
.................... 93, 101
5
AF lock ....................................................111, 361
6
AF+MF indicator
2
.......................................157
7
Microphone input channel ....................... 208
8
Shutter type ...................................................170
9
Recording level
2
........................................... 205
A
Continuous mode ........................................117
B
Self-timer indicator ..................................... 164
C
Remote recording function .......................293
D
Frame.io connection status ......................274
E
Exposure indicator ................................ 82, 109
F
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403
G
Flash compensation ...................................403
H
IS mode
2
.........................................................172
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
20
1
Before You Begin
Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.
N
Use D SCREEN SET-UP> VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to
choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.
SHOOTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
E
E
EYE SENSOR
EYE SENSOR
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfi nder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfi nder off .
EVF ONLY
EVF ONLY Viewfi nder on, LCD monitor off .
EVF ONLY +
EVF ONLY +
E
E
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on; taking it away turns the viewfi nder off . The LCD
monitor remains off .
E
E
EYE SENSOR + LCD
EYE SENSOR + LCD
IMAGE DISP.
IMAGE DISP.
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder during shooting
turns the viewfi nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
the display of images once you remove your eye from
the viewfi nder after shooting. The options selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor. This setting cannot be selected
while shooting movies.
N
Go to D SCREEN SET-UP> VIEW MODE SETTING> SHOOTING in
the setup menu and press the Q button to choose the view modes
available.
21
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
PLAYBACK
Option
Option
Description
Description
E
E
EYE SENSOR
EYE SENSOR
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfi nder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfi nder off .
EVF ONLY
EVF ONLY Viewfi nder on, LCD monitor off .
The Eye Sensor
•
The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on
the sensor.
•
The eye sensor is not available when the LCD
monitor is tilted.
Eye sensor
22
1
Before You Begin
Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the view nder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust view nder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE
DISPLAYS, the indicators in the view nder and LCD monitor au-
tomatically rotate to match camera orientation.
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the view nder and LCD
monitor.
N
Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose
the EVF display, place your eye to the view nder while using the
DISP/BACK button.
23
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Viewfi nder
Full screen
Full screen
(no indicators)
Standard indicators Standard (no indicators)
Dual display
N
The dual display is available only when shooting still images with man-
ual focus.
24
1
Before You Begin
LCD Monitor
Standard indicators Standard (no indicators)
Dual display Info display
N
The dual display is available only during manual focus.
The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a
smaller close-up of the focus area.
25
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Customizing the Standard Display
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:
1
Display standard indicators.
Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.
2
Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
Select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.
3
Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
•
FRAMING GUIDELINE
•
FOCUS FRAME
•
FOCUS INDICATOR
•
AF DISTANCE INDICATOR
•
MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
•
HISTOGRAM
•
LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT
•
SHOOTING MODE
•
APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO
•
INFORMATION BACKGROUND
•
Expo. Comp. (Digit)
•
Expo. Comp. (Scale)
•
FOCUS MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLASH
•
CONTINUOUS MODE
•
DUAL IS MODE
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
BOOST MODE
•
SHIFT AMOUNT OF T/S LENS
•
ROTATE AMOUNT OF T/S LENS
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
FRAMES REMAINING
•
IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
•
MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
•
35mm FORMAT MODE
•
COMMUNICATION STATUS
•
MIC LEVEL
•
GUIDANCE MESSAGE
•
NO STORAGE MEDIA WARNING
•
DATE/TIME
•
BATTERY LEVEL
•
FRAMING OUTLINE
4
Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
5
Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the
shooting display.
26
1
Before You Begin
Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.
Number of pixels
Shadows Highlights
Pixel brightness
•
Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve
throughout the tone range.
•
Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
•
Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.
To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-
play showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the func-
tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 358, 385).
A
Overexposed areas blink
B
RGB histograms
BA
27
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-
sen using D SCREEN SET-UP> ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D 3D
Pitch Roll
•
OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
•
2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
•
3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.
28
1
Before You Begin
The Secondary LCD Monitor
Among the settings that can be viewed
in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Dif-
ferent settings are displayed in still pho-
tography and movie modes.
Secondary LCD monitor
Default Settings
By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings list-
ed below.
N
The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP>
SUB MONITOR SETTING.
Still Photography Mode
Still Photography Mode
KK
DD
EE
FF
GG
II HHJJ
AA BBCC
Default
Default
A
SHUTTER SPEED
G
FILM SIMULATION
B
APERTURE
H
BATTERY LEVEL
C
ISO
I
FRAMES REM.
D
SHOOTING MODE
J
CARD SLOT OPTIONS
E
IMAGE SIZE
K d Scale
F
WHITE BALANCE
N
BATTERY LEVEL, FRAMES REM., and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot
be changed in the settings.
29
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Movie Mode
Movie Mode
JJKK II HHLL
GG
MM
AA BB CC DD
EE
FF
Default
Default
A
SHUTTER SPEED
H
FILM SIMULATION
B
APERTURE
I
WHITE BALANCE
C
ISO
J
MOVIE FORMAT
D
MOVIE MODE
K
SHOOTING MODE
E
BATTERY LEVEL
L
CARD SLOT OPTIONS
F
REMAINING TIME
M
Expo.Comp. & MIC LEVEL
G
TIME CODE
N
MOVIE MODE, BATTERY LEVEL, and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot
be changed in the settings.
Checking the functions assigned to function buttons
The functions assigned to the Fn1, Fn2, and
Fn3 buttons in D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can be checked on
the secondary LCD monitor.
A
Fn1 button
B
Fn2 button
C
Fn3 button
AA BB CC
30
1
Before You Begin
Cycling Through Indicators in the Secondary LCD Monitor
The indicators displayed in the second-
ary LCD monitor change each time the
secondary LCD monitor mode button is
pressed.
INFORMATION
*
DIALS
HISTOGRAM
* Displays movie information in movie mode.
31
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button
To turn on the secondary LCD monitor back-
light when you nd the secondary LCD monitor
too dark to read, press the secondary monitor
backlight button. Press the button again to turn
the backlight o .
Background Color
The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can
be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND
COLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is dis-
played in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.
32
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.
The Menus
Di erent menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
Shooting
Shooting
EXIT
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
RAW RECORDING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
STILL/MOVIE mode switch
set to STILL
EXIT
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
MEDIA REC SETTING
HIGH SPEED REC
MOVIE MODE
IMAGE FORMAT
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE SETTING
SELF-TIMER
STILL/MOVIE mode switch
set to MOVIE
Playback
Playback
EXIT
RESIZE
PROTECT
CROP
ERASE
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
RAW CONVERSION
SWITCH SLOT
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
PLAY BACK MENU
During playback
33
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:
1
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
EXIT
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
RAW RECORDING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left
to highlight the tab for the current
menu.
EXIT
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
RAW RECORDING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
Tab
3
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-
ing the desired item.
4
Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.
N
Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.
34
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.
Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING.
TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS
DOUBLE TAP SETTING
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
TOUCH FUNCTION
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
ON
OFF
EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-
tures are being framed in the electronic view nder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-
itor employed for touch controls.
N
You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-
ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING> SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
35
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indica-
tor in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
AF
AF
AFOFF
AFOFF
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AFOFF icon.
•
In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
O
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 163).
N
•
To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-
lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
•
Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during mov-
ie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 203)”.
36
1
Before You Begin
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING>
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode but-
ton in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
movie recording. This can be used to pre-
vent camera sounds being recorded with
movie footage.
Movie-optimized
mode button
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
•
EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
•
F ISO
•
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
•
WIND FILTER
•
HEADPHONES VOLUME
•
F FILM SIMULATION
•
F WHITE BALANCE
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
N
•
Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.
•
When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode
button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-opti-
mized control.
•
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT can be set only when an external
mic is connected.
37
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the follow-
ing ick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 385):
•
Flick up: T-Fn1
•
Flick left: T-Fn2
•
Flick right: T-Fn3
•
Flick down: T-Fn4
N
•
In some cases, touch-function ick ges-
tures display a menu; tap to select the
desired option.
-20
0
-6
-12
-40
-50
dB
LR
SET CANCEL
25.5
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
•
Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION.
38
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
•
Swipe: Swipe a nger across the display to
view other images.
•
Pinch-out: Place two ngers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.
•
Pinch-in: Place two ngers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.
N
Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
•
Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.
•
Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.
39
First Steps
40
2
First Steps
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below.
O
To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.
41
2
First Steps
Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place the
lens on mount, keeping the marks on the
lens and camera aligned (
A
), and then
slowly rotate the lens in the direction of
the arrow until it clicks into place (
B
).
O
•
When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
•
Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
•
Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
•
Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera o , then
press the lens release button (
A
) and slowly
rotate the lens as shown (
B
).
O
To prevent dust accumulating on the lens
or inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.
Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.
42
2
First Steps
Attaching a Lens
O
Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-
changing) lenses.
•
Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
•
Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light
source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to
malfunction.
•
Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
•
Do not rotate the lens while holding moving parts of the camera,
such as the aperture ring.
•
See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.
43
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.
1
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Slide the battery-chamber cover
latch as shown and open the bat-
tery-chamber cover.
O
•
Do not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Fail-
ure to observe this precaution could
damage image les or memory
cards.
•
Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.
2
Insert the battery as shown.
O
•
Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
•
Con rm that the battery is securely
latched.
44
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.
O
If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orienta-
tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-
er shut.
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera o and open the battery-cham-
ber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of the
camera as shown.
O
The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-
ments. Observe caution when removing the battery.
45
2
First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).
N
The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with
CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards.
1
Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.
O
Do not turn the camera o or remove the memory card while the
memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or de-
leted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-
age the card.
2
Insert the memory card.
Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Close
and latch the memory card slot cover.
O
Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle
or use force.
46
2
First Steps
Removing Memory Cards
Turn the camera o and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a
nger and then slowly releasing it; the card can
then be removed by hand.
O
•
Press the center of the card.
•
Suddenly removing your nger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your nger slowly.
•
If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the
touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.
47
2
First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
Using Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-
ond slot only when the card in the rst slot is full. This can be
changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP> x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option
Option
Description
Description
Display
Display
SEQUENTIAL
(default)
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the fi rst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE
DATA SET-UP> SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),
recording will start on the card in the second slot and
switch to the fi rst slot when the card in the second slot
is full.
BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
SEPARATE
RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the fi rst
slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the sec-
ond slot. This setting takes eff ect only when SUPER
FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW, or NORMAL+RAW is se-
lected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE
QUALITY.
RAW+JPEG
RAW+HEIF
The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE
SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING.
48
2
First Steps
Compatible Memory Cards
•
The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress
Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces
are supported.
•
CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for high-
speed burst photography.
•
The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary
with the settings selected (P 72).
•
A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fuji lm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/
.
O
•
Do not turn the camera o or remove the memory card while the memo-
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
•
Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a mem-
ory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
•
Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
•
miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-
era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
•
Do not a x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
•
Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
•
Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-
puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image les. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming les,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the
originals. Renaming the les on the camera can cause problems
during playback.
49
2
First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
Using an external SSD in place of a memory card
This camera can save still images and
movies to an SSD. If an SSD is connected
to the USB connector, an icon appears on
the screen, and the recording destination
is switched to the SSD automatically. To
record to a memory card, turn o the
camera, and then remove the SSD.
N
Even when an SSD is connected, you can select the SSD or a memory
card for playback by C PLAY BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT.
50
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at ship-
ment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera o .
O
•
An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
•
Charging takes about 180minutes.
1
Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.
Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
place on the AC power adapter terminals.
O
•
The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-
sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
•
The shape of the plug adapter varies with
the country of sale.
2
Charge the battery.
Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.
O
•
Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).
•
Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
51
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Battery status
Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Charging error
52
2
First Steps
O
•
The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
•
Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.
•
Do not a x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
•
Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
•
Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
•
Use only genuine Fuji lm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-
uct malfunction.
•
Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
•
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
•
If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
•
Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
•
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may nd
that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
•
Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
•
Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
•
Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.
N
•
If the camera is turned on during charging,
charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 328).
•
The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.
53
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
Charging via Computer
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with com-
puters with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.
Leave the computer on during charging.
O
•
The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
•
Connect the supplied USB cable.
•
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
•
Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
•
Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-
puter, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
•
The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input
of 5 V/500 mA.
54
2
First Steps
Turning the Camera On and O
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and o .
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera o .
O
Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or view nder can a ect pic-
tures or the view through the view nder. Keep the lens and view nder
clean.
N
•
Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
•
Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
•
The camera will turn o automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT>
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned o
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.
55
2
First Steps
Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:
Indicator
Indicator
Description
Description
e
Battery partially discharged.
f
Battery about 80% full.
g
Battery about 60% full.
h
Battery about 40% full.
i
Battery about 20% full.
i
(red)
Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
j
(blinks red)
Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
56
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the rst time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the rst time.
1
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.
3
Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or o using the focus stick (focus le-
ver), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.
OFF
GMT ±0:00
SET
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
AREA SETTING
BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING
NO
N
To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.
57
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
4
Set the clock.
..
BERLIN/PARIS
GMT +1:00
2023 31 12 12hAM12 00
NO
SET
DATE/TIME
5
View information on the smartphone app.
•
The camera will display a QR code
you can scan with your smartphone
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
•
Press MENU/OK to proceed to the
next step.
SET
APPLICATION
IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
N
Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely (P 247).
6
Choose an AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
•
The selected setting determines
the temperature at which the cam-
era will turn o automatically.
•
Press MENU/OK to exit to the shoot-
ing display.
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
SET
HIGH
STANDARD
SET THE "AUTO POWER OFF TEMP." TO "HIGH" TO EXTEND
THE RECORDING TIME. ONLY RECOMMENDED
WHEN NOT HANDHELD OR WHEN USING TRIPOD ETC.
7
Format the memory card (P 332).
O
Format memory cards before rst use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.
N
If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.
58
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
Choosing a Di erent Language
To change the language:
1
Display language options.
Select D USER SETTING> Qa.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:
1
Display DATE/TIME options.
Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME.
2
Set the clock.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
59
Basic Photography and
Playback
60
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 76–85 for information on S, A,
and M modes.
1
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.
2
Rotate the focus mode selector to S.
3
Rotate the mode dial to P.
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to
release the dial.
4
Con rm that P appears in the display.
61
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
5
Ready the camera.
•
Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or un-
steady hands can blur your shots.
•
To prevent pictures that are out of
focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your ngers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.
6
Frame the picture.
Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.
62
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
7
Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.
Focus indicator
Focus frame
•
If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
•
If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
N
•
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to
assist the focus operation.
•
Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is
kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
•
The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.
8
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.
63
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the view nder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001
Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-
cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press
the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.
N
Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY
BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT option.
64
3
Basic Photography and Playback
HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.
1
Turn the camera o .
2
Connect the cable as shown below.
Insert into
HDMI connector
Insert into HDMI
connector (Type A)
3
Con gure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-
umentation supplied with the device.
4
Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns o
in playback mode (P 65).
O
•
Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
•
Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long.
65
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Viewing Pictures
Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an exter-
nal recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-
itor turns o and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no e ect on
sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to
adjust the volume.
N
Some televisions may brie y display a black screen when movie play-
back begins.
66
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.
O
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
1
With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and
select FRAME.
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
ERASE
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a con rmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N
•
Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 228).
•
Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU> ERASE option (P 224).
67
Movie Recording and
Playback
68
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
This section describes how to lm movies in auto mode.
1
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
MOVIE.
2
Rotate the mode dial to P.
AUTO will appear in the display.
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.
69
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Recording will start.
•
A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
•
The borders of the display turn
red during movie recording, green
during high-speed recording.
Recording time
Time remaining
•
The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.
4
Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends
automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.
O
•
Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
•
Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
•
Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
70
4
Movie Recording and Playback
N
•
To maximize recording time:
-
keep the camera out of direct sunlight as much as possible, and
-
turn the camera o any time it is not in use.
•
The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
•
To prevent the borders of the display changing color during mov-
ie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING> F REC FRAME
INDICATOR.
•
While recording is in progress, you can:
-
Adjust sensitivity
-
Refocus using any of the following methods:
•
Press the shutter button halfway
•
Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
•
Use touch screen controls
-
Display a histogram or arti cial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-
signed
•
Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
•
To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING> FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 97).
71
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns o to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external micro-
phones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website
72
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Adjusting Movie Settings
•
Pressing MENU/OK when MOVIE is selected with the STILL/MOVIE
mode switch displays the movie menu.
•
Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted us-
ing MOVIE MODE.
•
Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the le
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
•
Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regard-
less of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch
to focus mode C(continuous AF) when FACE DETECTION ON
or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING>
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING. Note, however, that choosing focus mode M when
FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected
disables face and subject detection.
O
•
The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING.
-
Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.
-
Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.
-
Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.
-
Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.
Depth of Field
Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be ad-
justed when the mode dial is set to A(aperture-priority AE) or M(manual).
73
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
Any movie selected after the a button is
pressed to begin playback will be indicat-
ed by a W icon. Press the focus stick (fo-
cus lever) down to start movie playback.
+1.0
12800
AUDIO SET.PLAY
The following operations can be per-
formed while a movie is displayed:
Focus stick
Focus stick
(focus lever)
(focus lever)
Full-frame playback
Full-frame playback
Playback in
Playback in
progress (
progress (
x
x
)
)
Playback
Playback
paused (
paused (
y
y
)
)
Up
View photo
information
End playback
Down Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Adjust speed
Single frame rewind/
advance
Progress is shown in the display during
playback.
STOP PAUSE
74
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Viewing Movies
O
Do not cover the speaker during playback.
N
•
Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press
the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press
MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME.
•
To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the
camera monitor, press the a button (P 64).
Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to
adjust playback speed during playback. Speed
is shown by the number of arrows (M or N).
29m59s29m59s
Arrows
75
Taking Photographs
76
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.
1
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.
2
Rotate the mode dial to P.
P will appear in the display.
O
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
•
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
77
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the front command
dial to select other combinations of shutter
speed and aperture without altering exposure
(program shift).
Aperture
Shutter speed
O
Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:
•
When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING
•
When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
In movie mode
N
To cancel program shift, turn the camera o .
78
5
Taking Photographs
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.
1
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.
2
Rotate the mode dial to S.
S will appear in the display.
3
Rotate the rear command dial to
choose the shutter speed.
79
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
O
•
If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-
ture display will show “– – –”.
•
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
N
•
Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
•
At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
•
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
•
The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.
80
5
Taking Photographs
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.
1
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.
2
Rotate the mode dial to A.
A will appear in the display.
3
Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N
•
If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.
•
If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” po-
sition, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture
when the aperture ring is rotated to A or C.
•
The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-
ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
81
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
O
•
If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
•
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
N
Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button dis-
plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of eld to be
previewed in the display.
82
5
Taking Photographs
Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed
(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-
pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-
ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.
1
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.
2
Rotate the mode dial to M.
M will appear in the display.
83
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
3
Rotate the rear command dial to
choose a shutter speed and the lens
aperture ring to choose the aperture.
N
•
The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator
that shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-ex-
posed at current settings.
•
If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.
•
If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” po-
sition, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture
when the aperture ring is rotated to A or C.
•
The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-
ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.
BULB
Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which
you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is rec-
ommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.
1
Set shutter speed to BULB.
84
5
Taking Photographs
2
Press the shutter button all the way down.
•
The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.
•
The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.
•
Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the
exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.
O
Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or multiple exposure or when the electronic shutter is selected
for A SHOOTING SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE.
N
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this
may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
85
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-ex-
posures. When using an optional RR-100 re-
mote release or an electronic release from
third-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
microphone/remote release connector via a
third-party ⌀2.5mm to 3.5mm adapter.
N
A con rmation dialog will be displayed
when a remote release is connected; press
MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/
REMOTE RELEASE.
CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
SETTING
SKIP
SET
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP> PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.
N
Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the ash
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the pic-
ture is taken.
86
5
Taking Photographs
Custom Modes
Rotate the mode dial to any of modes
C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6)
to take pictures using previously-saved
shooting menu settings.
Saving Current Settings
Save current settings in a custom settings bank.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight a destination bank for cur-
rent settings (C1 through C6) and
press MENU/OK.
EXIT
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 3
3
Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
and press MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
EXIT
87
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Current settings will be saved to the
selected bank.
CUSTOM 1
SAVE THE CHANGES OK?
OK
CANCEL
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
EXIT
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 3
3
Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
EXIT
88
5
Taking Photographs
4
The camera will display a list of shoot-
ing menu items; highlight an item
you wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.
CUSTOM 1
EXIT
EXP. COMPENSATION
DRIVE MODE
APERTURE
SHUTTER SPEED
SHOOTING MODE
5
Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.
N
If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING, red dots will appear next to the edit-
ed items but the changes will not be saved automatically.
•
To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
•
To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE
THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous
settings, select RESET THE CHANGES.
•
If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied
with the changes intact.
Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-
named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING
in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to
B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
89
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
2
Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.
EXIT
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 3
3
Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
EXIT
4
Highlight the destination bank (C1
through C6) and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be displayed.
N
Any changes to custom settings in the
destination bank will be overwritten.
COPY TO
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 3
5
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.
OK
CANCEL
COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
90
5
Taking Photographs
Resetting Custom Settings
Reset selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING
in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography.
To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the
movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
EXIT
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 3
3
Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING
and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be displayed.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
EXIT
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected bank will be reset.
RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?
RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT
OK
CANCEL
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
91
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING
in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photogra-
phy. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in
the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
EXIT
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 3
3
Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and
press MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
EXIT
4
Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.
93
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Focus Mode
Use the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.
Choose from the following options:
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
S
(AF-S)
Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
C
(AF-C)
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to refl ect changes in the
distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Use for subjects that are in motion.
M
(manual)
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual
control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (P 101).
N
•
Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
•
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.
94
5
Taking Photographs
The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
Focus status
Focus status
( ) Camera focusing.
z
(lights green)
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S).
(z)
(lights green)
Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjust-
ed for changes in distance to subject.
A
(blinks white)
Camera unable to focus.
j
Manual focus (focus mode M).
95
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.
1
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE.
3
Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Option
Option
Description
Description
Sample image
Sample image
r
SINGLE POINT
Camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point. Use for pin-
point focus on selected subject.
y
ZONE
Camera focuses on subject in se-
lected focus zone. Focus zones in-
clude multiple focus points, mak-
ing it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.
z
WIDE
Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.
j
ALL
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-
play (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE ALL SETTING.
96
5
Taking Photographs
Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Option
Option
Description
Description
Sample image
Sample image
r
SINGLE POINT
Focus tracks subject at selected fo-
cus point. Use for subjects moving
toward or away from camera.
y
ZONE
Camera tracks focus in selected fo-
cus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.
z
TRACKING
Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.
j
ALL
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-
play (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE ALL SETTING.
97
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display
1
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS AREA to view the fo-
cus-point display.
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N
The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 34).
98
5
Taking Photographs
Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option se-
lected for AF mode.
AF mode
AF mode
Focus stick
Focus stick
Rear command dial
Rear command dial
Tilt
Tilt
Press
Press
Rotate
Rotate
Press
Press
r
r
Select focus
point
Select center
focus point
Choose from 6
frame sizes
Restore original
size
y
y
z
z
—
N
•
Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING
is selected in focus mode S.
•
You can also press the DISP/BACK button to return the focus area to the
center.
99
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N
•
Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the
large squares.
•
The dimensions of ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONE
CUSTOM 3 can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING> ZONE
CUSTOM SETTING.
AF mode
AF mode
r
r
SINGLE POINT
SINGLE POINT
y
y
ZONE
ZONE
z
z
WIDE/TRACKING
WIDE/TRACKING
Number of points avail-
able can be selected using
G
AF/MF SETTING>
NUMBER OF FOCUS
POINTS.
Choose from zones with
7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus
points or from ZONE
CUSTOM 1, ZONE
CUSTOM 2, and ZONE
CUSTOM 3.
Position focus frame over
subject you want to track
using continuous AF.
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
•
Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
•
Subjects photographed through a window or other re ective object.
•
Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than re ect light, such as
hair or fur.
•
Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or ame.
•
Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
•
Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).
100
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear command
dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rear
command dial again to cancel zoom.
Normal display Focus zoom
N
•
In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command
dial.
•
The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in
e ect.
•
In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
•
Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when
G AF/MF
SETTING>
PRE-AF is on.
•
Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the rear command
dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls
(P 385).
101
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.
1
Rotate the focus mode selector to M.
j will appear in the display.
2
Focus manually using the lens focus
ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.
3
Take pictures.
N
•
Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS RING to reverse the direc-
tion of rotation of the focus ring.
•
Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
102
5
Taking Photographs
Quick Focus
•
To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
•
In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-
sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> xF INSTANT AF SETTING.
103
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-
cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of eld, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)
Depth of eld
N
•
If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-
of- eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
•
Use the G AF/MF SETTING> xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of eld for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of eld for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.
104
5
Taking Photographs
Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK, the
camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated.
Press the center of the rear com-
mand dial to exit zoom.
N
•
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
•
Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-
not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.
MF Assist
Use
G
AF/MF SETTING> MF ASSIST (P 158) in the photo
menus or
G
AF/MF SETTING> F MF ASSIST (P 201) in the
movie menus to choose a focus check option.
N
The focus check options for movies di er from those for still photog-
raphy.
•
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image
in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and ro-
tate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.
•
DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that
emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.
105
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
•
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-
trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.
•
FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below
the focus point indicating whether fo-
cus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it is
behind the subject. Adjust focus so the
needle is pointing straight up.
N
The display reverses when YCCW is selected for
D
BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> FOCUS RING.
•
FOCUS MAP: Square indicators are dis-
played in focus frames to indicate points
that are in focus and not in focus by color.
A green indicator is displayed on a point
in focus on the subject and a point the
same distance as the subject. A yellow
indicator is displayed on a point in front
of the focus position, and a blue indicator is displayed on a point
behind the focus position.
N
•
You can change the indicator colors to monochrome using G AF/
MF SETTING> F MF ASSIST in the movie menus. With this setting,
a white indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus posi-
tion, and a black indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus
position.
•
Indicators may not be displayed for subjects that are di cult to cap-
ture with auto focus (P 99).
106
5
Taking Photographs
Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Sensitivity settings can be displayed by pressing the Fn button to
which sensitivity is assigned.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shoot-
ing conditions according to combination of standard and
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed cho-
sen for A SHOOTING SETTING>ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 107).
80–12800
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis-
play.
L(40)
H(25600/51200/102400)
Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may ap-
pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.
N
•
Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned o .
•
If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND
DIAL SETTING to con gure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be
adjusted using the front or rear command dial.
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.
107
5
Taking Photographs
Sensitivity
AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Item
Item
Options
Options
Default
Default
AUTO1
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO3
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY 80–12800 80
MAX. SENSITIVITY 200–12800 800 1600 3200
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ¼ –30SEC, AUTO AUTO
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-
fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
N
•
If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
•
The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
•
If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will auto-
matically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image sta-
bilization is on or o ).
108
5
Taking Photographs
Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING> PHOTOMETRY o ers a choice of the
following metering options:
O
The selected option will only take e ect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
o
MULTI
MULTI
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an
analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution.
Recommended in most situations.
p
CENTER-
CENTER-
WEIGHTED
WEIGHTED
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
v
SPOT
SPOT
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
w
AVERAGE
AVERAGE
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same
lighting, and is particularly eff ective for landscapes and
portraits of subjects dressed in black or white.
N
To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING> INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 159).
109
5
Taking Photographs
Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Hold the Fn button to which exposure compensation is assigned
and rotate the rear command dial to select the desired value.
N
The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O
•
The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
•
Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately re ect its e ects if:
-
the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
-
W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
-
STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the view nder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the
display may not accurately re ect the e ects of exposure compensa-
tion during F-Log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is select-
ed for F
DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.
110
5
Taking Photographs
Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
1
Position the subject in the focus
frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).
2
Press the button all the way down.
N
Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.
111
5
Taking Photographs
Focus/Exposure Lock
Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At de-
fault settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK
ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock fo-
cus without locking exposure.
•
While the assigned control is pressed,
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
•
If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
ended by pressing the control a second
time.
AEL button
(exposure lock)
AFON button
N
•
The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
•
The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure
and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 387).
112
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight one
of the following:
3
Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired
bracketing settings.
4
Press MENU/OK to select.
5
Take pictures.
Option
Option
P
P
W ISO BKT
113
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
113
Option
Option
P
P
s Bracketing
114
113
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take
a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with
sensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode dis-
play. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot
and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white
balanced setting, one with ne-tuning increased by the selected
amount, and another with ne-tuning decreased by the selected
amount.
114
5
Taking Photographs
s Bracketing
O AE BKT
Use A SHOOTING SETTING> AE BKT SETTING to choose the
bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the speci ed number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or un-
der-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.
N
Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.
X FILM SIMULATION BKT
Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with di erent lm simulation settings,
chosen using
A
SHOOTING SETTING> FILM SIMULATION BKT.
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots with di erent dynamic ranges: 100% for the rst, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
N
While dynamic range bracketing is in e ect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO320; the sensitivity previously in e ect is restored
when bracketing ends.
115
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a se-
ries of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTING
SETTING> FOCUS BKT SETTING item o ers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.
N
•
Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUAL
MANUAL
In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAMES Choose the number of shots.
STEP Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
INTERVAL Choose the interval between shots.
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.
12345
Starting focus position
•
Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infi nity.
•
Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
changes.
•
Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reach-
es infi nity.
Frames
Step
116
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
AUTO
AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP auto-
matically.
1
Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, high-
light FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
2
Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.
The view through the lens will be displayed.
3
Focus on the nearest end of the sub-
ject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.
SETSET POINT B
SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
FOCUS BKT SETTING
N
The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest
end of the subject rst.
4
Focus on the farthest end of the sub-
ject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and
focus range (A to B) appear on the
focus distance indicator.
SETSET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT B
FOCUS BKT SETTING
N
Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.
5
Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in the
display.
NO
117
5
Taking Photographs
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.
2
If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is
selected, the camera will take pictures continuously while
the shutter-release button is pressed.
Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.
O
•
If le numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-
maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
•
Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insu cient.
•
Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
•
Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the ash
may not re.
•
Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
•
The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE.
118
5
Taking Photographs
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Focus and Exposure
•
Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
•
To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> SHUTTER AE.
N
Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-
pensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.
119
5
Taking Photographs
Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.
2
Choose a blend mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ADDITIVE
The camera adds the exposures together. You may need
to lower exposure compensation depending on the
number of shots.
AVERAGE
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the
fi nal picture. The background in series shot without
changing the composition will be optimally exposed.
BRIGHT
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
DARK
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
3
Take the rst shot.
120
5
Taking Photographs
Multiple Exposures
4
Press MENU/OK. The rst shot will be
shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.
EXITRETRY
NEXT
N
•
To return to the previous step and retake the rst shot, press the
focus stick (focus lever) left.
•
To save the rst shot and exit without creating a multiple expo-
sure, press DISP/BACK.
5
Take the second shot, using the rst
frame as a guide.
EXIT
6
Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be dis-
played as a guide to composing the
next shot.
EXITRETRY
N
•
To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
•
To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.
7
Make additional exposures.
Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.
8
Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.
The camera will create the combined image and multiple ex-
posure shooting will end.
121
5
Taking Photographs
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot
The camera takes a series of 4 or 16 shots, using in-body
image stabilization to move the image sensor by half a pix-
el with each shot and recording each frame in RAW format.
Using specialized computer software, the frames can then
be combined to create a high-resolution RAW picture.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and se-
lect PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
ACCURATE COLOR or PIXEL SHIFT
MULTI SHOT HIGH RESOLUTION +
ACCURATE COLOR.
2
Choose a value for INTERVAL.
•
We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST.
•
If you intend to use the ash with every shot, choose a val-
ue for INTERVAL long enough to allow the ash to charge
between shots.
3
Press the shutter button to start shooting.
•
The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format.
•
To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote re-
lease.
4
Combine the shots on a computer.
•
The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
•
To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use
Capture One Express for Fuji lm, Capture One for Fuji lm, or
Capture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by
SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose.
122
5
Taking Photographs
N
•
Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the follow-
ing computer software:
-
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
-
Capture One Express for Fuji lm:
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
-
Capture One for Fuji lm:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
-
Capture One Pro:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features
•
Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tethered
shooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
•
The ash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1⁄5s or
slower (14-bit RAW) or ½ .5s or slower (16-bit RAW).
•
The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot
option:
-
Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using
the electronic shutter.
-
Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher
values or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while
lower values remain unchanged.
-
The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESS
COMPRESSED.
-
Pictures taken with C (AF-C) selected for focus mode will be shot
in focus mode S (AF-S). Pictures taken with S (AF-S) or M (manual)
selected are shot in the chosen focus mode.
-
If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results
may not be achieved when the shots are combined.
-
A
SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set
to OFF.
-
The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 4 or 16
shots.
124
MEMO
125
The Shooting Menus
126
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
EXIT
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
RAW RECORDING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
O 4 : 3
11648 × 8736
O 3 : 2
11648 × 7768
O 16 : 9
11648 × 6552
O 1 : 1
8736 × 8736
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
O 65 : 24
11648 × 4304
O 5 : 4
10928 × 8736
O 7 : 6
10192 × 8736
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 4 : 3
8256 × 6192
P 3 : 2
8256 × 5504
P 16 : 9
8256 × 4640
P 1 : 1
6192 × 6192
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 65 : 24
8256 × 3048
P 5 : 4
7744 × 6192
P 7 : 6
7232 × 6192
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
Q 4 : 3
4000 × 3000
Q 3 : 2
4000 × 2664
Q 16 : 9
4000 × 2248
Q 1 : 1
2992 × 2992
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
Q 65 : 24
4000 × 1480
Q 5 : 4
3744 × 3000
Q 7 : 6
3504 × 3000
N
IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned o or another
shooting mode is selected.
127
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a le format and compression ratio.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SUPER FINE
Very low compression ratios are used for maximum image quality.
FINE
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
NORMAL
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
images that can be stored.
SUPER FINE + RAW Record both RAW and super-fi ne quality
JPEG or HEIF images
.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and fi ne-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW
Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or o for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 385). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option currently selected for
Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY
Option selected by pressing function
Option selected by pressing function
button to which
button to which
RAW
RAW
is assigned
is assigned
SUPER FINE SUPER FINE + RAW
FINE FINE + RAW
NORMAL NORMAL + RAW
SUPER FINE + RAW SUPER FINE
FINE + RAW FINE
NORMAL + RAW NORMAL
RAW FINE
128
6
The Shooting Menus
RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
RECORDING TYPE
Option
Option
Description
Description
UNCOMPRESSED RAW images are not compressed.
LOSSLESS
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces fi le size with no loss of image data. The im-
ages can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifi lm
1
,
Capture One for Fujifi lm
1
, Capture One
1
, RAW FILE
CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
2
, FUJIFILM X RAW
STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting fi les are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent (14-bit RAW) or 45 to 100 percent (16-bit RAW) of
their uncompressed size.
COMPRESSED
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting fi les are anywhere from about 25 to 35 per-
cent (14-bit RAW) or 30 to 40 percent (16-bit RAW) of their
uncompressed size.
1 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-powered-
by-silkypix/
OUTPUT DEPTH(bit)
Option
Option
Description
Description
16bit RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 16 bits.
14bit
RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits.
O
16bit is available in STILL IMAGE and PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT drive
modes only.
129
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option
Option
Description
Description
JPEG
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG for-
mat.
HEIF
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent com-
pression but limited options for viewing and sharing.
O
•
JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during multiple-ex-
posure photography.
•
Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
•
HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as les with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the ex-
tension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.
130
6
The Shooting Menus
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the e ects of di erent kinds of lm, including black-
and-white (with or without color lters). Choose a palette ac-
cording to your subject and creative intent.
Option
Option
Description
Description
c PROVIA/STANDARD
Ideal for a wide range of subjects.
d Velvia/VIVID
Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.
e ASTIA/SOFT
Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.
i CLASSIC CHROME
Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
c
REALA ACE
Faithful color reproduction with hard tonality suitable for
various scenes.
g PRO Neg. Hi
Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.
h PRO Neg. Std
Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
g
CLASSIC Neg.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
n
NOSTALGIC Neg.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
X ETERNA/CINEMA
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for fi lm look
movie.
N ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suit-
able for still and movie.
131
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Option
Option
Description
Description
a ACROS
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) fi lters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
•
d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
•
c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
•
b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
b MONOCHROME
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) fi lters, which deepen shades of gray cor-
responding to hues complementary to the selected color.
•
e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
•
d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and dark-
ens skies considerably.
•
f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
f SEPIA
Shoots in sepia tone.
N
•
Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
•
Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376).
•
For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories
132
6
The Shooting Menus
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or
cool color cast) to the a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME monochrome lm
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
SET
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a lm grain e ect.
ROUGHNESS
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for rougher grains.
WEAK Choose for smoother grains.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
SIZE
Option
Option
Description
Description
LARGE Choose for coarser grains.
SMALL Choose for fi ner grains.
133
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
134
6
The Shooting Menus
DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of de-
tail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
V 100%
Choose for increased contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
W 200%
X 400%
O
Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.
N
•
If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-
ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-
ter button is pressed halfway.
•
W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO160 to ISO12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO320 to 12800.
135
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-
ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-
ditions.
STRONG
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
WEAK
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
OFF
Contrast reduction off.
N
•
WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO320 to 12800.
•
When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to ad-
just these settings manually, choose OFF.
136
6
The Shooting Menus
WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
Option
Option
Description
Description
WA WHITE
PRIORITY
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically.
AA AMBIENCE
PRIORITY
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
k CUSTOM 1
Measure a value for white balance.
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
TEMPERATURE
Choose a color temperature.
i DAYLIGHT
For subjects in direct sunlight.
j SHADE
For subjects in the shade.
k FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
Use under “daylight” fl uorescent lights.
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
Use under “warm white” fl uorescent lights.
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3
Use under “cool white” fl uorescent lights.
n INCANDESCENT
Use under incandescent lighting.
g UNDERWATER
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
lighting.
137
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
N
•
In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for
example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance op-
tion suited to the light source.
•
White balance is adjusted for ash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
ash o using other white balance options.
•
White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376).
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white
balance option displays a ne-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to
ne-tune white balance.
WB SHIFT
SET
N
•
To exit without ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-
lecting a white balance option.
•
You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when ne-tuning white bal-
ance.
138
6
The Shooting Menus
Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (col-
ored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tar-
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is lled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the ne-tuning dialog).
•
If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK
to set white balance to the measured
value.
•
If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
•
If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure com-
pensation and try again.
k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N
Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “cold-
er” or deliberately produce colors that di er radically from those in real
life.
NOT CHANGESHIFT
CUSTOM 1
SHUTTER : NEW WB
COMPLETED !
SET CANCEL
139
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
1
Select k in the white balance menu.
The option currently selected for col-
or temperature will be displayed.
R:0 B:0
WHITE BALANCE
SET SHIFT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
2
Edit the color temperature using the
focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A ne-tuning dialog will be dis-
played.
SHIFTSET
COLOR TEMPERATURE
N
•
You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10K by
rotating the rear command dial.
•
Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000K.
•
To exit without ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.
3
Highlight a ne-tuning amount using the focus stick.
4
Press MENU/OK.
The changes will be applied. The se-
lected color temperature will appear
in the display.
Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, ex-
pressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.
140
6
The Shooting Menus
TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer.
CANCELSET
HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS
TONE CURVE
Option
Option
Description
Description
HIGHLIGHTS -2 to +4
SHADOWS -2 to +4
COLOR
Adjust color density.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose high-
er values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
141
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
CLARITY
Increase de nition while altering tones in highlights and shad-
ows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased de -
nition, lower values for a softer e ect.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
O
The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.
LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save
times.
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve de nition by adjusting for di raction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
Options
ON OFF
COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option
Option
Description
Description
sRGB Recommended in most situations.
Adobe RGB For commercial printing.
142
6
The Shooting Menus
xF PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures or mov-
ies.
1
Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING tab.
2
Highlight xF PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to per-
form pixel mapping.
O
•
Results are not guaranteed.
•
Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
•
Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-
vated.
•
Processing may take several tens of seconds.
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situa-
tions. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to
positions C1(CUSTOM1) through C6(CUSTOM6) (P 86).
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply auto-
matically.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ENABLE
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 6 apply automatically.
DISABLE
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 87).
143
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 197).
Shutter Select
When using lenses with an internal shutter, choose whether to
use the shutter on the camera (BODY) or the lens (LENS).
O
This option may have no e ect with some lenses.
Saved Settings
Store settings for up to 6 lenses, or choose OFF to disable correc-
tions for focal length, distortion, color shading, and peripheral
illumination.
Choosing a Focal Length
Choosing a Focal Length
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to enter
the focal length.
INPUT FOCAL LENGTH
LENS 5
CANCELSET
Distortion Correction
Distortion Correction
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.
BARREL STRONG
LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION
PINCUSHION MEDIUM
PINCUSHION STRONG
PINCUSHION WEAK
OFF
BARREL WEAK
BARREL MEDIUM
144
6
The Shooting Menus
Color Shading Correction
Color Shading Correction
Color (shading) variations between the
center and edges of the frame can be ad-
justed separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow the
steps below.
NEXT
SET
1
Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-
ed corner is indicated by a triangle.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is
no visible di erence in color between the selected corner and
the center of the image.
•
Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the
cyan–red axis.
•
Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the
blue–yellow axis.
N
To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
145
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Choose from values between –5 and
+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral il-
lumination. Positive values are recom-
mended for vintage lenses, negative val-
ues to create the e ect of images taken
with an antique lens or a pinhole camera.
N
To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-
rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
EDIT LENS NAME
EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.
CANCEL
SET
146
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab.
EXIT
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
yz
xF
WRAP FOCUS POINT
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
AF MODE ALL SETTING
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
FOCUS AREA
AF MODE
AF/MF SETTING
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 97).
AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 95).
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
Create custom focus zones for use when ZONE is selected for AF
MODE.
Option
Option
ZONE CUSTOM 1 ZONE CUSTOM 2 ZONE CUSTOM 3
AF MODE ALL SETTING
Choose the focus area to be selected when AF MODE is ALL.
You can match the shooting style and set only the focus area to
be used. This can be set individually for when the focus mode is
S(AF-S) or C(AF-C).
Option
Option
AF-S AF-C
147
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for focus
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options.
OK
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Option
Option
Description
Description
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
A standard tracking option that works well with
the typical range of moving subjects.
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES &
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
DECELERATING SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to compensate for
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING
SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
subjects entering the focus area. Choose for sub-
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switch-
ing subjects.
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
movements front to back and left to right.
SET 6 CUSTOM
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 148, 150).
148
6
The Shooting Menus
Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the
camera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
LOCKED ON
QUICK
SETS THE TRACKING
SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
SWITCH
ADJUST
Options
Options
01234
O
•
The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
•
The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensi-
tive the tracking system is to changes in
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
system attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ACCEL./DECEL.
STEADY
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
SWITCHADJUST
Options
Options
012
O
The higher the value, the more di culty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly re ective or low in contrast.
149
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
FRONTCENTER
AUTO
SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
SWITCHADJUST
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
AUTO
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
CENTER Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
O
This option takes e ect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the di erent sets are listed below.
TRACKING
TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING
SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA
ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
SWITCHING
SET 1
SET 1
20AUTO
SET 2
SET 2
3 0 CENTER
SET 3
SET 3
22AUTO
SET 4
SET 4
0 1 FRONT
SET 5
SET 5
32AUTO
150
6
The Shooting Menus
Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.
1
Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS>
SET 6 CUSTOM.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 6 CUSTOM
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
AUTO
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
RESETSET DETAIL
ADJUST
2
Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.
3
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in por-
trait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
camera is in landscape orientation.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.
151
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>
AF MODE.
Options
Options
ON OFF
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders
of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to
another.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ENABLE
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of the
display to another.
DISABLE Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-
lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
grid.
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
grid.
152
6
The Shooting Menus
PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator
in some cases.
•
If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
subject.
•
Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 200).
153
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for por-
traits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FACE DETECTION
ON
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
•
g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
•
u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
•
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
•
v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off .
O
•
If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
•
In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
•
Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON auto-
matically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
154
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
•
If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
•
You can choose a di erent subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
•
When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
•
If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-
ed at the close of burst shooting.
•
Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-
entation.
•
If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
•
Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 376).
155
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SUBJECT
DETECTION ON
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
•
E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
•
F BIRD: Camera detects and tracks focus on birds and in-
sects.
•
G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
for motor sports.
•
H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
•
I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes and drones.
•
J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF Subject detection off .
O
Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.
156
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
•
If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
•
You can choose a di erent subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
•
If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be sus-
pended at the close of burst shooting.
•
Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
•
Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 376).
157
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus
mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the
focus distance indicator.
•
If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to
in nity or the minimum focus distance.
N
•
The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
•
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist op-
tions selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.
AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area
by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.
158
6
The Shooting Menus
MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104).
Option
Option
Description
Description
DIGITAL SPLIT
IMAGE
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
DIGITAL
MICROPRISM
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK
HIGHLIGHT
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
peaking level.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
If ON is selected, the display con gured by MF ASSIST appears
only when the focus ring was turned during manual focus mode.
Options
Options
ON OFF
159
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-
cus mode.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom.
•
The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
Options
ON OFF
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or
AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AF-S
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
AF-C
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).
160
6
The Shooting Menus
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of- eld scale.
Option
Option
Description
Description
PIXEL BASIS
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of fi eld
for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
FILM FORMAT
BASIS
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of fi eld
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
as prints.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera behaves when the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. Settings for AF-S and AF-C focus
modes can be selected separately.
Option
Option
Description
Description
RELEASE
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
FOCUS
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.
O
Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.
161
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Focus limiter disabled.
CUSTOM
Limit focus to a range of distances defi ned by a minimum and
maximum.
•
OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
•
SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance be-
tween them.
PRESET1
Limit focus to a preset range.
PRESET2
O
•
Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the min-
imum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
•
The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may di er from
the actual focus distance.
•
Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with fo-
cus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.
N
•
The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:
-
You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
range.
-
Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to in nity by rotating the focus ring.
•
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).
162
6
The Shooting Menus
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
AF
AFOFF
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AFOFF icon.
•
In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
N
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
T
o disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for
D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING
>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
.
163
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
Mode
Operation performed
Operation performed
AF
AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AREA
AREA
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
OFF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
164
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the
A
(SHOOTING SETTING) tab.
N
The options available vary with the shoot-
ing mode selected.
EXIT
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
AE BKT SETTING
FILM SIMULATION BKT
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
SELF-TIMER
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SHOOTING SETTING
SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option
Option
Description
Description
R 2 SEC
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
S 10 SEC
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF Self-timer off .
If an option other than OFF is selected, the
timer will start when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.
9
O
•
Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
•
The self-timer turns o automatically when the camera is turned o .
165
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remain
in e ect after the camera is turned o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
Options
ON OFF
166
6
The Shooting Menus
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Con gure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.
1
Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
in the
A
(SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER
WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
2
Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
and press MENU/OK.
Interval-timer settings will be dis-
played.
INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES
INTERVAL
NUMBER OF TIMES
CANCELEND
N
If you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
EXTERNAL TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,
where you can start interval-timer photography using the remote
release.
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
choose the interval and number of
shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.
LATER
START WAITING TIME
CANCELSTART
PM
ESTIMATED START TIME
167
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
4
Use the focus stick to choose the
starting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.
CANCEL
O
Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of
“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.
N
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
•
We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
•
To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter-
val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press the
a button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
•
The display turns o between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
•
The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
•
The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are o during
interval-timer photography.
•
To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-
phy started, set the number of shots to ∞.
168
6
The Shooting Menus
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-
ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL
TIMER SHOOTING> INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
•
In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during in-
terval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not lon-
ger than the interval between photographs.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
This option takes e ect only when shutter speed is set to A(auto).
169
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
•
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence.
•
STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each
shot.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
•
1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
•
CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.
FILM SIMULATION BKT
Choose the three lm simulation types used for lm simulation
bracketing (P 130).
FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes
(P 115).
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 108).
170
6
The Shooting Menus
SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option
Option
Description
Description
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER
Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
SHUTTER
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
u MECHANICAL+
ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
shutter according to shooting conditions.
r E-FRONT+ ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
conditions.
If t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER is selected, t MECHANICAL
SHUTTER will automatically take e ect at high shutter speeds.
O
•
When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
-
Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
-
Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high
shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
-
Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under uorescent lights
or other ickering or erratic illumination.
-
When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 340), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
•
When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:
-
Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure
and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.
N
The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:
•
Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 80–12800
•
Long exposure noise reduction has no e ect
•
The ash will not re unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled.
171
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce icker in pictures and the display when shooting under
uorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ALL FRAMES
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
FIRST FRAME
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the fi rst frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subse-
quent frames that fl icker may occur.
OFF Flicker reduction disabled.
O
•
Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
•
OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shut-
ter is used.
•
Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be ne-tuned to reduce ick-
er caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
This option takes e ect only in modes S and M.
ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 106).
172
6
The Shooting Menus
IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS Image stabilization on.
SHOOTING ONLY
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
OFF
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N
•
The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
•
Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes e ect.
35mm FORMAT MODE
Enabling
A
SHOOTING SETTING> 35mm
FORMAT MODE in the shooting menu sets
the picture angle to 35 mm; the change is
re ected in the display.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The picture angle is set to 35mm; the change is refl ected in the
display.
OFF 35mm format mode disabled.
AUTO
35 mm format mode is enabled automatically when a mount
adapter that supports automatic detection is attached.
N
•
The DSCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING item in the setup
menu (P 25, 349) includes an option (enabled by default) for dis-
playing a 35mm FORMAT MODE icon.
•
The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-
ing menu is xed at O 3 : 2.
173
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 416).
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO1
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at slow speed.
AUTO2
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased
fan noise may be audible in movies.
LOW Run the fan continuously at low speed.
HIGH
Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fan
noise may be audible in movies.
OFF Turn the fan off .
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
•
Control the camera and take pictures remotely
•
Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
•
Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
•
Upload location data to the camera
N
For more information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
174
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust ash-related settings for still photography.
To display ash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the F(FLASH SETTING) tab.
EXIT
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
TTL-LOCK MODE
RED EYE REMOVAL
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a ash control mode, ash mode,
or sync mode or adjust the ash level.
The options available vary with the ash.
N
For more information on ash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 400) in “Peripher-
als and Optional Accessories”.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye e ects caused by the ash.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FLASH Flash red-eye reduction only.
OFF Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off .
N
Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL ash control mode.
175
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting ash level with each shot, TTL ash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-
graphs.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING
FLASH
The camera emits a series of pre-fl ashes and locks fl ash
output at the metered value.
N
•
To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 385).
•
Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in e ect.
•
Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.
LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the ash unit’s LED video light (if avail-
able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
Option
Option
Role of LED video light in still photography
Role of LED video light in still photography
CATCHLIGHT Catchlight
AF ASSIST AF-assist illuminator
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
OFF None
N
In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
176
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera ash unit as a command-
er for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on ash units that
support Fuji lm optical wireless ash control.
Options
Options
Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF
N
In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the com-
mander and remote ash units. Separate channels can be used
for di erent ash systems or to prevent interference when multi-
ple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
Options
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
177
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,
press MENU/OK in the movie shooting dis-
play and select the B(MOVIE SETTING)
tab.
EXIT
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
MEDIA REC SETTING
HIGH SPEED REC
MOVIE MODE
IMAGE FORMAT
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE SETTING
SELF-TIMER
MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.
N
These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.
IMAGE FORMAT
You can change the format of movies to be shot depending on
the lens to be used. Frame size and aspect ratio are set by MOVIE
MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
GF Shoot in the optimal format for GF Series lenses.
Premista Shoot in the optimal format for Premista Series lenses.
35mm Shoot in the optimal format for 35-mm format lenses.
ANAMORPHIC(35mm)
Shoot in the optimal format for anamorphic lenses. You can
confi gure the lens magnifi cation or whether to use the des-
queeze display when taking pictures.
O
•
When ANAMORPHIC(35mm) is set, an anti-vibration func-
tion operates to match the con gured magni cation. Do not set
ANAMORPHIC(35mm) when using a lens other than an anamorphic
lens.
•
When B MOVIE SETTING> HDMI OUTPUT SETTING> HDMI
OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY is set to OFF, HDMI output does not use
the desqueeze display, even when desqueeze display is set to ON for
ANAMORPHIC(35mm).
178
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the
frame rate and the frame size and aspect
ratio.
MOVIE MODE
CANCELEND
1
In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-
light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the
desired frame size and aspect ratio (
A
) and press the stick
right.
The setting values that can be selected depend on the IMAGE
FORMAT setting.
3
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
frame rate (
B
) and press MENU/OK.
Options
Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P
N
The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.
179
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too eeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N
Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders
connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.
Frame Size
Options
Options
W16 : 9 W17 : 9
Recording
Options
Options
100P 120P
Playback
Options
Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P
N
•
High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
•
The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
•
The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.
180
6
The Shooting Menus
F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
•
The display shows the number of sec-
onds remaining before recording be-
gins.
•
To stop the timer before recording be-
gins, press DISP/BACK.
Options
Options
3 SEC 5 SEC 10 SEC OFF
181
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, bit
rate, and proxy video.
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and
compression.
Destination
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for mov-
ies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
P
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Q
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2.
R
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card
fi lls. Any additional footage will then automatically be record-
ed to the card in Slot 2.
T
Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
Y
Movies are recorded only to an SSD connected to the USB con-
nector.
U
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.
O
The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.
182
6
The Shooting Menus
File Type and Compression
File Type and Compression
Choose the movie le type and compression.
Option
Option
Description
Description
H.264 ALL-I 420 MOV
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP in-
terframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sam-
pling.
H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
to the web.
H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma
sub-sampling.
H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0
chroma sub-sampling.
H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma
sub-sampling.
H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2
chroma sub-sampling.
ProRes HQ MOV
*
Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format.
ProRes 422 MOV
*
Record movies in ProRes 422 format.
ProRes LT MOV
*
Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format.
* Available only when P is selected as the destination.
183
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
N
•
The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on a
computer or the like.
•
4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external
devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
•
All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact
that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
•
Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
•
The options available for le type and compression vary with the op-
tions selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.
Bit Rate
Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
Options
50Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps 360Mbps 720Mbps
N
•
The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for
high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate
may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
•
The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to the for-
mat chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit the
Apple website.
184
6
The Shooting Menus
PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes)
Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate
“proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON (H.264) Record proxy videos in H.264 format.
ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format.
OFF Proxy recording disabled.
O
•
Proxy recording is not available at a frame size of 8K if the frame rate
is either 29.97P or 25P.
•
Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy
video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately.
•
When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer,
be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies.
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
185
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
Option
Option
Description
Description
RAW OUTPUT
RAW OUTPUT
SETTING ATOMOS
SETTING ATOMOS
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
RAW OUTPUT
SETTING Blackmagic
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
OFF Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.
N
•
Movie frame size automatically changes to 8K.
•
RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
•
In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
•
ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 640 and ISO 12800.
•
Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device speci cations, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production
or the like.
•
Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
•
RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not dis-
play correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
•
RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio according to the IMAGE FORMAT set-
ting. This makes it easier to match crops after changing movie
settings.
Options
Options
ON OFF
186
6
The Shooting Menus
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option
Option
Description
Description
c P Y P
The footage is processed using fi lm simulation and both
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
c F-Log Y F-Log
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
c FLog2 Y FLog2
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
c HLG Y HLG
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in HLG format.
N
•
F-Log and FLog2 o er gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO400 and ISO12800 (F-Log) or between ISO800
and ISO12800 (FLog2).
•
The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the in-
ternational ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO640 and ISO12800.
•
Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.
187
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
VIDEO RANGE
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
FULL RANGE
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.
F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 108).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 171).
Options
Options
ON OFF
188
6
The Shooting Menus
F IS MODE
Choose the image stabilization mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
IBIS/OIS
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
IBIS/OIS + DIS
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE. This setting can compensate
for more severe camera shake.
OFF
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N
•
The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
•
Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes e ect.
F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Suitable for shots with no panning.
OFF Suitable for shots with panning.
N
Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-
bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 385).
189
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Option
Option
Description
Description
H (25600)
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may
be reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
100–12800
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in
display.
AUTO
The ISO sensitivity (ISO100 to ISO12800) for the brightness
of the subject is set automatically.
ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ZEBRA RIGHT
Right-slanting stripes.
ZEBRA LEFT
Left-slanting stripes.
OFF Stripes off .
ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
Options
Options
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
190
6
The Shooting Menus
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Choose whether to display chrominance and luminance signals
during movie recording. The position and size can be changed
using the focus stick (focus lever) and command dials.
Options
Options
WAVEFORM PARADE VECTORSCOPE OFF
WAVEFORM
A waveform is displayed.
WAVEFORM SETTING
SWITCH DISP.
SET
PARADE
An RGB parade is displayed. You can
change the display method for colors by
turning the front command dial.
PARADE SETTING
SWITCH DISP.
COLORSET
191
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
VECTORSCOPE
A vectorscope is displayed.
VECTORSCOPE SETTING
SWITCH DISP.
SET
OFF
Neither a waveform monitor, a parade, nor a vectorscope is dis-
played.
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may nd this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being re-
corded with movies (P 36).
Options
Options
ON OFF
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie record-
ing.
192
6
The Shooting Menus
TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT OFF
REAR z
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
FRONT OFF
REAR y
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
FRONT z
REAR z
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
FRONT z
REAR OFF
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
FRONT y
REAR y
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
FRONT y
REAR OFF
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
FRONT OFF
REAR OFF
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
193
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 86).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).
194
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
EXIT
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
FCOLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGE
FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FFILM SIMULATION
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
FTONE CURVE
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 130).
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
195
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
V100%
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 134).W200%
X400%
N
•
AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
•
W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO200 to ISO12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO400 to 12800.
•
This item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING> F-Log/HLG RECORDING.
F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 136).
F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).
F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).
196
6
The Shooting Menus
F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
Options
AUTO OFF
N
“Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.
xF PIXEL MAPPING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).
197
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY
Choose whether to make the dynamic range wider when shoot-
ing F-Log2 movies with IMAGE FORMAT set to GF or Premista,
image size set to d or V, and a frame rate of 30 fps or less.
The rolling shutter e ect may occur when this setting is enabled.
Options
Options
ON OFF
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the
option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> xF MOUNT
ADAPTOR SETTING> PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 145).
•
Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-
tion.
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 143). Changes to
one apply to the other.
198
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab.
EXIT
F
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
F
AF+MF
Fg
FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
xF
WRAP FOCUS POINT
F
AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
F
AF MODE
F
FOCUS AREA
AF/MF SETTING
xF
AF ILLUMINATOR
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 97).
O
The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MULTI The camera selects the focus area automatically.
WIDE/TRACKING
The camera tracks the subject automatically if the focus stick
(focus lever) is pushed to the center or the screen is touched
when the focus mode is C. The camera selects the focus
subject automatically when the focus mode is S.
AREA The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.
199
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-
ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-
ject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 148).
Options
Options
01234
O
•
The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
•
The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 151). Changes to
one apply to the other.
200
6
The Shooting Menus
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 152). Changes to
one apply to the other.
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FACE DETECTION ON
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 153).
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off .
O
When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus us-
ing continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 155).
O
The camera automatically switches to
continuous AF
when SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.
201
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button.
Options
Options
ON OFF
F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104).
Option
Option
Description
Description
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
color and peaking level.
FOCUS METER
A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
HIGHLIGHT
Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
FOCUS MAP
Indicators for locations in and out of focus are displayed
on the screen.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 158).
202
6
The Shooting Menus
F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 159).
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 160). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.
203
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
AF
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
lected by tapping the display.
•
When shooting movies in focus mode M(MF), you can tap the
display before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to posi-
tion the focus point.
AREA
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
•
In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
•
In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
lected by tapping the display.
•
In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-
tion the focus area over your subject.
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
N
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
T
o disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for
D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING
>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
.
204
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
Mode
Operation performed
Operation performed
AF
AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AREA
AREA
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
OFF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in e ect once movie re-
cording begins.
Options
Options
ON OFF
205
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during lming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the P(AUDIO SETTING) tab.
EXIT
HEADPHONES VOLUME
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
LOW CUT FILTER
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
MIC JACK SETTING
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
AUDIO SETTING
WIND FILTER
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off .
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.
206
6
The Shooting Menus
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
phone.
LINE
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
Options
ON OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
207
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut lter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
Option
Description
Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/re-
mote release connector is a microphone or a remote release.
Options
Options
m MIC n REMOTE
208
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC INPUT CHANNEL
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
•
4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
•
2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
•
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con-
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
•
CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in mi-
crophone.
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
OUTPUT
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
•
XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI con-
nector.
•
CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
N
•
If an XLR microphone adapter will be used, remove the view nder.
•
If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
•
Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie le format.
209
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame num-
ber) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q(TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.
EXIT
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
COUNT UP SETTING
START TIME SETTING
TIME CODE DISPLAY
TIME CODE SETTING
DROP FRAME
TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
Options
ON OFF
START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME
Set the start time to the current time.
RESET Set the start time to 00:00:00.
210
6
The Shooting Menus
COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
REC RUN Time is clocked only during movie recording.
FREE RUN Time is clocked continuously.
DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-
ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
OFF Frames are not dropped.
N
•
The time code display varies with the option selected.
ON
OFF
•
Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.
211
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
Options
ON OFF
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
Choose whether to synchronize time codes with an external de-
vice.
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
If ON is selected, the camera connects with paired external de-
vices and synchronizes time codes. Because simultaneous con-
nection with a smartphone is not possible, the smartphone icon
is displayed in the yellow on the screen.
Options
Options
ON OFF
PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the ATOMOS AirGlu BT and camera.
•
If the camera connects with the ATOMOS
AirGlu BT, an icon appears on the screen.
•
The pairing with the ATOMOS AirGlu BT can be ended using
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
in the network/USB setting menu.
212
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Time code synchronization state
You can check the time code synchronization
state by the icons displayed on the EVF or LCD.
Icon
Icon
Synchronization state
Synchronization state
(white)
The time code synchronization function is not
being used.
(white)
Time codes are being synchronized.
(amber)
External devices have been disconnected or time
codes are not being synchronized. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the camera
continues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value is
displayed.
(red)
Time codes are not being synchronized because
the frame rate settings are diff erent. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the camera
continues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value is
displayed.
213
Playback and the Playback
Menu
214
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.
O
For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
12/31/2023
IC D E F G H
AB
K
L
M
N
J
U
WXYZab
Q PRST
V
c
d
e
f
g
i
j
k
l
m
n
O
h
215
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
A
Date and time ..................................56, 58, 333
B
Frame-number display
C
Image transfer order
D
FTP image transfer order
E
Frame.io image transfer order
F
Image transfer status
G
FTP upload progress
H
Frame.io upload progress
I
Frame number .............................................. 369
J
SSD connection status ..................................49
K
Card slot..........................................................220
L
Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................121
M
Protected image ...........................................228
N
Location data................................................373
O
Low battery ......................................................55
P
Image quality................................................127
Q
Movie mode .................................................. 178
R
HEIF ..................................................................129
S
Image size ......................................................126
T
Film format .................................................... 182
U
Film simulation ............................................ 130
V
Dynamic range ............................................134
W
White balance .............................................. 136
X
Sensitivity ....................................................... 171
Y
Exposure compensation ............................109
Z
Aperture ...............................................77, 80, 82
a
Time code .......................................................209
b
Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
c
Playback mode indicator .............................63
d
Movie icon ........................................................73
e
Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio ... 208
f
Bluetooth host ..............................................247
g
Photobook assist indicator .......................236
h
Bluetooth ON/OFF
i
DPOF print indicator ................................... 238
j
Frame.io connection status ......................274
k
Voice memo ..................................................230
l
Gift image .........................................................63
m
Rating ..............................................................231
n
Face detection indicator ............................153
216
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.
Standard Information o
1/99912/31/2023
1/99912/31/2023
NEXT
Info display
217
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes each
time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.
Basic data Info display 1
1/99912/31/2023 1/99912/31/2023
NEXT
S.S
FISO
1/1000 5.6 12800 +1.0
BACK
5.6 12800 +1.01/1000
NEXT
12/31/2022
Info display 3 Info display 2
Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.
218
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to
playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Rotate the rear com-
mand dial to right or left, the display changes as shown. The dis-
play changes in reverse order when rotate the dial to opposite
direction.
N
To cancel playback zoom or multi-frame playback, press DISP/BACK or
MENU/OK.
Maximum zoom Medium zoom
Playback zoom
Full-frame playback
Multi-frame playback
Nine-frame view Hundred- frame view
219
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Pictures
Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.
N
The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick
(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the
image not currently visible in the display.
Navigation window
Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-
mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N
•
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
•
In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.
220
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.
EXIT
RESIZE
PROTECT
CROP
ERASE
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
RAW CONVERSION
SWITCH SLOT
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card or SSD from which images will be played back.
N
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a but-
ton during playback to choose a card for playback.
221
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format
1
Display a RAW picture.
2
Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3
Press MENU/OK.
A list of settings will be displayed.
CREATE
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE
RAW CONVERSION
CANCEL
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
setting.
5
Press the focus stick right to display
options.
RAW CONVERSION
200
%
400
%
100
%
6
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
7
Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
8
Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9
Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
N
RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-
ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.
222
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from
RAW to another format are:
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
Create a copy using the settings in eff ect at the time
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE
Choose a fi le format.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY
Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE
Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
for natural-looking results when photographing
high-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the eff ects of diff erent types of fi lm.
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs tak-
en using FILM SIMULATION> a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a fi lm grain eff ect.
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE
Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT
Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE
Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR
Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR
Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY
Increase defi nition.
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Improve defi nition by adjusting for diff raction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
O
Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.
223
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
Options
Options
JPEG TIFF 8bit TIFF 16bit
SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the destination to which the converted pictures will be
saved.
Options
Options
SSD SLOT 1 SLOT 2
224
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-
tures.
O
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME Delete pictures one at a time.
SELECTED FRAMES Delete multiple selected pictures.
ALL FRAMES Delete all unprotected pictures.
FRAME
1
Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete.
N
•
A con rmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
•
Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-
cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to
delete.
225
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
SELECTED FRAMES
1
Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
•
Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
•
To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3
When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
con rmation dialog.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-
tures.
N
Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1
Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
A con rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N
•
Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
•
If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.
226
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA
SET-UP>x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
OFF
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.
1
Display the desired picture.
2
Select CROP in the playback menu.
3
Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.
4
Press MENU/OK to display a con rmation dialog.
5
Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
le.
N
•
The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
•
If the size of the nal copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
•
All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.
227
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.
1
Display the desired picture.
2
Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
3
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a con rmation
dialog.
4
Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
le.
N
The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.
228
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
SET ALL Protect all pictures.
RESET ALL Remove protection from all pictures.
O
Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N
•
Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-
phones or tablets removes upload marking.
•
Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON but-
ton during playback.
229
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.
1
Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB.
2
Display the desired picture.
3
Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.
5
Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in
the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
N
•
Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-
tating pictures.
•
The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
•
Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB are auto-
matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.
230
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.
1
Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
2
Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
3
Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-
cord the memo. Recording ends after 30s or when you re-
lease the dial.
N
•
The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
•
Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
•
Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
•
To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-
mand dial.
•
A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
•
Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then
pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME.
231
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
RATING
Rate pictures using stars.
1
Select RATING in the playback menu.
2
Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the
rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).
N
•
The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front com-
mand dial to choose a picture.
•
The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in
single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
•
Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
•
Ratings cannot be applied to:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
232
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
COPY
Copy pictures between a card in the rst slot, a card in the sec-
ond slot, and an SSD connected to the USB connector.
1
Select COPY in the playback menu.
2
Highlight one of the following options.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SSD y SLOT1
Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the fi rst slot.
SSD y SLOT2
Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the second slot.
SLOT1 y SSD
Copy pictures from the card in the fi rst slot to the SSD.
SLOT1 y SLOT2
Copy pictures from the card in the fi rst slot to the card in
the second slot.
SLOT2 y SSD
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the SSD.
SLOT2 y SLOT1
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
in the fi rst slot.
3
Press the focus stick (focus lever) right.
4
Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME
Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right to
view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
ALL FRAMES Copy all pictures.
O
•
Copying ends when the destination is full.
•
If you attempt to copy a le over 4GB in size to a memory card with
a capacity of 32GB or less, copying will end and the le will not be
copied.
233
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth.
1
Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE> SELECT IMAGE&
TRANSFER.
N
Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.
2
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
•
To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
that meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
•
To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
•
Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
3
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be upload-
ed.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
234
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
•
To display only pictures that meet selected cri-
teria, choose FILTERING.
•
To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
O
Switching slots or changing the lter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
•
The following cannot be selected for upload:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
RAW images
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
•
If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is o .
•
When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the
picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.
235
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
•
Control the camera and take pictures remotely
•
Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
•
Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
•
Upload location data to the camera
N
•
For downloads and other information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
•
If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the Fn1 button.
DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK
If ON is selected, movies taken when
B
MOVIE SETTING > IMAGE
FORMAT is set to ANAMORPHIC(35mm) are played back at the
magni cation speci ed when taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
236
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1
Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU> PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.
2
Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-
ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the
book is complete.
N
•
Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
•
The rst picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-
cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.
3
Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-
lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N
•
Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
•
Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
237
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.
Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-
screen instructions.
•
EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
•
ERASE: Delete the book.
238
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.
1
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
2
Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-
tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.
3
Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
print order.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to choose the number of
copies (up to 99).
N
To remove a picture from the order,
press the focus stick down until the
number of copies is 0.
Total number
of prints
Number of copies
N
Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5
The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N
•
The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
•
Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
•
If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.
01
PRINT ORDER
(
DPOF
)
SHEETS
SETFRAME
DPOF:
00001
239
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fuji lm instax SHARE printers, rst
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.
1
Turn the printer on.
2
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-
nect to the printer.
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CONNECTING
CANCEL
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.
100-0020
SET CANCEL
instax-12345678
PRINTER PRINT
N
•
Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
•
The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
•
The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
240
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High De nition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).
Options
Options
16 : 9 4 : 3
N
Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 4 : 3 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.
241
Network/USB Setting Menus
242
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and
take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.
Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:
Features that can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
Feature
Feature
Description
Description
P
P
Connecting to the
Connecting to the
smartphone app
smartphone app
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
pictures or control the camera remotely while the
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
247
USB card readers
USB card readers
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone
via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
252
Web camera
Web camera
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
as a webcam.
257
instax printers
instax printers Print pictures on connected instax printers. 258
Tethered photography
Tethered photography
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
is connected (“tethered”) via a USB cable.
260
RAW processing
RAW processing
Harness the power of the camera’s image
processing engine when processing RAW pictures
on a computer.
291
Saving and Loading
Saving and Loading
Settings
Settings
Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a
computer.
292
These features can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
243
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Overview
Features that can be accessed if set by CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING
Feature
Feature
Description
Description
P
P
Tethered photography
Tethered photography
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
is connected (“tethered”) via wireless or wired LAN.
260
Upload to FTP servers
Upload to FTP servers Upload fi les to FTP servers. 278
Remote movie
Remote movie
recording
recording
Control the camera and take pictures remotely using
a web browser on a computer or tablet.
293
These features can be accessed by selecting a connection setting
pro le to which the desired settings and connection type have
been saved using CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING.
Features that can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting menu
Feature
Feature
Description
Description
P
P
Upload to Frame.io
Upload to Frame.io Upload fi les to Frame.io. 270
These features can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting
menu.
244
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Camera indicator lamp display
The camera indicator lamp shows the
status of its connection to computers,
Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Connection status
Connection status
Blinks red No network connection.
Glows red No network connection; pictures awaiting upload.
Blinks orange
Connected to network but not to computer teth-
ered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server.
Blinks orange and red
Connected to network but not to computer teth-
ered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server;
pictures awaiting upload.
Blinks green
Ready for tethered photography, upload to Frame.io,
or FTP upload.
Blinks green and red
Ready for tethered photography, upload to
Frame.io, or FTP upload; pictures awaiting upload.
245
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Overview
The EVF/LCD Displays
The status of the connection to computers,
Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like is also shown
by an icon in the electronic view nder or LCD
monitor.
Icon
Icon
Connection status
Connection status
No network connection.
Connected to network but not to computer teth-
ered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server.
Ready for tethered photography, FTP upload, or
upload to Frame.io.
246
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Overview
Connection Setting Pro les
Connection setting pro les contain information on both network
settings and the type of connection used. You can connect to
computers and smartphones by selecting the associated pro le.
Selecting a Connection Setting Profi le
To select a connection setting pro-
le, press MENU/OK and choose SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING in the I (net-
work/USB setting) tab.
NO
T
C
REATE
D
NO
T
C
REATE
D
USB WEBCAM
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB CARD READER
UNIVERSAL SETTING
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
N
For tethered photography via wireless LAN, you will rst need to create
and save a new connection setting pro le by following the instruc-
tions of a wizard displayed by selecting CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING.
Saving Connection Setting Profi les
To create a connection setting pro le containing information on
network/USB settings and the type of connection used, select
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB set-
ting menu.
Choose CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING> CREATE USING WIZARD, se-
lect the desired network/USB settings,
and save the resulting pro le (P 313).
TETHER SHOOTING
PRINTER PRINT
WEBCAM
USB CARD READER
SMARTPHONE APP
CONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP
CREATE USING WIZARD
247
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® to
copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera re-
motely while previewing the view through the lens in the
smartphone display.
N
The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.
Installing Smartphone Apps
Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and
camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smart-
phone app. Visit the following website and install the desired
apps on your phone.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
N
The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.
1
Press DISP/BACK while shooting infor-
mation is displayed.
N
You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the DISP/BACK
button during playback.
248
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
2
Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Bluetooth
3
Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK.
Bluetooth ON/OFF
PAIRING
Bluetooth
4
Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone
with the camera.
More information is available at the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the cam-
era and smartphone will automati-
cally connect via Bluetooth. A smart-
phone icon and a white Bluetooth
icon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.
N
•
Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automati-
cally connect to the camera when the app is launched.
•
Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smart-
phone reduces the drain on the battery.
249
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Using the Smartphone App
Before launching the smartphone app, choose 1: UNIVERSAL
SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
N
Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF.
Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App
You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using the
smartphone app.
N
More information is available from the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired de-
vice.
N
•
If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is o .
•
Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> RESIZE
IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu en-
ables compression, reducing le size for upload (P 322).
•
Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING> SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.
250
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu
Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE> SELECT IMAGE &
TRANSFER to select pictures for upload to a paired smartphone
or tablet via Bluetooth®.
1
Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE> SELECT IMAGE
& TRANSFER.
N
Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.
2
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
•
To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
that meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
•
To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
•
Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
3
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be upload-
ed.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
251
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
•
To display only pictures that meet selected cri-
teria, choose FILTERING.
•
To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
O
Switching slots or changing the lter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
•
The following cannot be selected for upload:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
RAW images
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
•
If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is o .
•
When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the
picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.
252
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone
Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.
For Customers Using Android Devices
How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
connector with which your smartphone is equipped.
Type-C
Type-C
Use the supplied USB cable.
Supplied USB cable
Type-C connector (male) Type-C connector (male)
253
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Micro-B
Micro-B
Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable.
Third-party USB cable USB OTG cable
Type-C connector (male) Micro-B connector (male)
Type-A connector
(male)
Type-A connector
(female)
O
•
The smartphone must support USB OTG.
•
The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
3
Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.
N
If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the
“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and move
on to the next step.
4
On your smartphone, tap the noti cation “Connected to USB
PTP”.
5
From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.
The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-
tos and movies to your smartphone.
N
If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the
app, please try again from step 3.
254
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
For Customers Using iOS
Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a
USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB
Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter.
Third-party USB cable
Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter
Type-C connector (male) Use an Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter
Type-A connector (male)
1
Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER
SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
2
Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
3
Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.
Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your
smartphone.
O
•
A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and
other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
•
The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter.
255
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connecting the Camera and Computer
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
3
Turn the camera o .
4
Turn the computer on.
5
Connect a USB cable.
USB connector (Type-C)
O
The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be
suitable for data transfer.
6
Turn the camera on.
7
Copy pictures to your computer.
•
Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer
using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or oth-
er software. Use a card reader to copy les over 4GB in size.
•
Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.
256
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
O
•
Turn the camera o before disconnecting the USB cable.
•
When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-
serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the
computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
•
Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-
necting the camera.
•
If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-
able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
•
Make sure that the indicator lamp is o or lit green before turning
the camera o .
•
Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card.
•
Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.
•
In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-
alone computer.
•
Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-
connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in
progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has
ceased to be displayed.
•
The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or
Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.
257
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Choose 6: USB WEBCAM for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4
Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-
cam.
258
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.
Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and
password.
The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
“1111”. If you have already chosen a di erent
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.
259
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
instax SHARE Printers
Printing Pictures
1
Choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
2
Turn the printer on.
3
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-
nect to the printer.
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CONNECTING
CANCEL
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
4
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK.
100-0020
SET CANCEL
instax-12345678
PRINTER PRINT
N
•
Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
•
The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
•
The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
5
The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.
260
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography
The camera can be controlled remotely and photographs
taken from a computer connected via USB or wireless or
wired LAN.
•
Tethered Photography via USB (P 260)
•
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN (P 262)
•
Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 267)
Tethered Photography via USB
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photog-
raphy.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Choose either 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or 4: USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.
O
•
If 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-
tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to
which the camera is connected is turned on. When the com-
puter is o or not connected, tethered photography will be sus-
pended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card.
•
If the camera is disconnected from the computer while 4: USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to func-
tion in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
261
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography
4
Take pictures via tethered photography.
Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic+ FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in” or “FUJIFILM X Acquire”.
N
•
For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
•
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
262
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN
Connect to a wireless LAN to use a computer on the network for
tethered photography.
1
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING> CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose TETHERED SHOOTING (P 313).
2
Select CREATE NEW.
N
Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select
from a list of existing connection set-
ting pro les.
SELECT FROM LIST
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
TETHER SHOOTING
3
Press MENU/OK when prompted.
NEXT BACK
SELECT COMM SETTING
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION
4
Select WIRELESS LAN.
WIRED LAN
WIRELESS LAN
USB
TETHER SHOOTING ON WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION
IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD
SELECT COMM SETTING
5
Select CREATE NEW to create a new
communication setting pro le.
N
You can also select or edit existing pro-
les.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
263
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography
6
Adjust wireless LAN settings.
•
ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-
ple Access Point Connections”
(P 264).
•
IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connect-
ing Using an IP Address” (P 265).
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
7
After adjusting wireless LAN settings,
select NEXT.
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
8
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
9
Save the connection setting pro le.
Press MENU/OK.
NEXT BACK
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING
10
Select CREATE NEW.
CREATE NEW
US
B WEB
C
AM
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
264
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
11
Name the connection setting pro le.
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
SET
12
Choose SELECT.
N
The connection setting pro le can
also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING
FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"
SELECT
SKIP
SETTING COMPLETE
13
Take pictures remotely from the computer.
Use software that supports tethered photography.
N
•
For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
•
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
Simple Access Point Connections
Connect to a computer for tethered photography using the sim-
ple setup feature on your wireless LAN router.
1
Select SIMPLE SETUP.
N
To select a wireless LAN router or en-
ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP.
SET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC
(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)
SIMPLE SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
ACCESS POINT SETTING
265
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography
2
Follow the on-screen instructions to
ready the wireless LAN router.
N
You also have the option of connect-
ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.
SIMPLE SETUP
PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING
CANCEL
CONNECT BY PIN CODE
3
Press MENU/OK when setup is com-
plete.
MANUAL SETUP
REGISTRATION COMPLETED
END
Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to a computer for tethered photography using a man-
ually-created network/USB setting pro le giving the IP address
and other network settings.
1
Select MANUAL.
N
Select AUTO to assign the camera an
IP address automatically.
000.000.000.000
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
N
EXT
IP ADDRE
S
ACC
E
SS
P
WIRELESS LAN
SS
PO
LA
AUTO
MANUAL
2
Enter an IP address.
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
GATEWAY ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS SETTING
266
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
•
Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP
address.
IP ADDRESS
SET
ENTER CANCEL
•
Select SUBNET MASK and enter a
subnet mask.
ENTER CANCEL
SET
SUBNET MASK
•
Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and en-
ter a gateway address.
SET
GATEWAY ADDRESS
ENTER CANCEL
•
Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and
enter a DNS server address.
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
SET
ENTER CANCEL
267
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography
Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to wired LANs (Ethernet networks) for tethered photog-
raphy using network computers.
1
Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into
the camera’s LAN connector.
2
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING> CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose TETHERED SHOOTING.
3
Select CREATE NEW.
N
Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select
from a list of existing connection set-
ting pro les.
SELECT FROM LIST
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
TETHER SHOOTING
4
Press MENU/OK when prompted.
NEXT BACK
SELECT COMM SETTING
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION
5
Select WIRED LAN.
WIRED LAN
WIRELESS LAN
USB
TETHER SHOOTING ON WIRED LAN CONNECTION
IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD
SELECT COMM SETTING
268
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
6
Select CREATE NEW to create a new
communication setting pro le.
N
You can also select or edit existing pro-
les.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
7
Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.
•
Select AUTO to use an IP address as-
signed by the network.
•
Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 265).
AUTOIP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
8
Select NEXT to proceed after adjust-
ing IP address settings.
AUTOIP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
9
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
10
Save the connection setting pro le.
Press MENU/OK.
NEXT BACK
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING
269
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Tethered Photography
11
Select CREATE NEW.
CREATE NEW
US
B WEB
C
AM
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
12
Name the connection setting pro le.
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
SET
13
Choose SELECT.
N
The connection setting pro le can
also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING
FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"
SELECT
SKIP
SETTING COMPLETE
14
Take pictures remotely from the computer.
Use software that supports tethered photography.
N
•
For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
•
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
270
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
Upload les to Frame.io (P 425).
•
Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 270)
•
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 272)
N
Con rm that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date be-
fore proceeding.
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to Frame.io via wireless LAN.
1
Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud>
CONNECT.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
NOT CONNECTED
UPLOAD STATUS
UPLOAD SETTING
SELECT FILE TYPE
DISCONNECT
CONNECT
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
2
Select WIRELESS LAN.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
NOT CONNECTED
GET PAIRING CODE
WIRED LAN
WIRELESS LAN
CONNECT
3
Select ACCESS POINT SETTING.
Select IP ADDRESS SETTING to
choose the IP address manually as
described in “Connecting Using an IP
Address” (P 273).
FINISH
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
271
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
4
Select SIMPLE SETUP.
N
To select a wireless LAN router or en-
ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP.
SET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC
(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)
SIMPLE SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
ACCESS POINT SETTING
5
Follow the on-screen instructions to
ready the wireless LAN router.
N
You also have the option of connect-
ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.
SIMPLE SETUP
PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING
CANCEL
CONNECT BY PIN CODE
6
Press MENU/OK when setup is com-
plete.
MANUAL SETUP
REGISTRATION COMPLETED
END
7
Once connected, select GET PAIRING
CODE.
A pairing code will be displayed.
AAAAAA003
WIRELESS LAN
SUCCESS
GO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
GET PAIRING CODE
CHANGE NETWORK
FINISH
8
Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and en-
ter the pairing code displayed on the camera.
9
Upload les to Frame.io (
P 275
).
272
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to Frame.io via wired LAN (Ethernet).
1
Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into
the camera’s LAN connector.
2
Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud>
CONNECT.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
NOT CONNECTED
UPLOAD STATUS
UPLOAD SETTING
SELECT FILE TYPE
DISCONNECT
CONNECT
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
3
Select WIRED LAN.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
NOT CONNECTED
GET PAIRING CODE
WIRED LAN
WIRELESS LAN
CONNECT
4
Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.
•
Select AUTO to use an IP address as-
signed by the network.
•
Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 273).
IP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
FINISH
5
Once connected, select GET PAIRING
CODE.
A pairing code will be displayed.
AAAAAA003
WIRED LAN
SUCCESS
GO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
GET PAIRING CODE
CHANGE NETWORK
FINISH
273
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
6
Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and en-
ter the pairing code displayed on the camera.
7
Upload les to Frame.io (
P 275
).
Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to Frame.io using a manually-created network/USB set-
ting pro le giving the IP address and other network settings.
1
Select MANUAL.
N
Select AUTO to assign the camera an
IP address automatically.
000.000.000.000
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
NEXT
IP ADDRE
S
ACC
E
SS
P
WIRELESS LAN
SS
PO
LA
AUTO
MANUAL
2
Enter an IP address.
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
GATEWAY ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS SETTING
•
Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP
address.
IP ADDRESS
SET
ENTER CANCEL
•
Select SUBNET MASK and enter a
subnet mask.
ENTER CANCEL
SET
SUBNET MASK
274
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
•
Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and en-
ter a gateway address.
SET
GATEWAY ADDRESS
ENTER CANCEL
•
Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and
enter a DNS server address.
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
SET
ENTER CANCEL
Connection Status
The status of the connection to Frame.io is
shown by an icon in the electronic view nder
or LCD monitor.
Icon
Icon
Connection status
Connection status
(white)
Connected to Frame.io.
(amber)
Camera has temporarily suspended upload to
Frame.io. To resume, select Frame.io Camera
to Cloud> UPLOAD SETTING> TRANSFER/
SUSPEND> TRANSFER.
(gray)
Not connected to Frame.io.
(red)
Frame.io server has set camera status to “paused”.
To restore connection, clear “paused” status using
computer or other device.
275
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
Uploading Items to Frame.io
Uploading Selected Items Using “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”
1
Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud in network/USB settings
menu.
2
Select UPLOAD SETTING> SELECT
IMAGE & TRANSFER.
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER
AAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAA
WIRELESS LAN
CONNECTED
ROOT CERTIFICATE
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
UPLOAD SETTING
N
•
The NETWORK eld shows how the camera is connected to the net-
work and the Frame.io eld, the status of the connection to Frame.io.
•
The PROJECT and USER elds show information supplied to Frame.
io using a computer or other device. Note that some characters may
not display correctly, in which case they will be replaced by question
marks (“?”).
3
Mark items for upload.
Highlight photos and movies and
press MENU/OK to mark them for up-
load.
•
To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only items that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/
BACK before marking begins.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
•
To select all items, press the Q button.
•
Selecting any two items with the AEL button also selects all
items between them.
276
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
4
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected items will be uploaded
to Frame.io.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
BACK
Filtering Items/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only items that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the selection dialog.
•
To display only items that meet selected crite-
ria, choose FILTERING.
•
To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
BACK
O
Switching slots or changing the lter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 items.
•
If ON is selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud> IMAGE TRANSFER
WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is
o .
277
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files to Frame.io
Uploading Photos and Movies as They Are Taken
Photos and movies shot with ON selected for Frame.io Camera
to Cloud> UPLOAD SETTING> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for
upload.
Selecting Photos and Movies for Upload During Playback
If HFrame.io TRANSFER ORDER is selected for DBUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> aFn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark les for up-
load or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1
button during playback.
278
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
You can connect the camera to an existing FTP server and
upload pictures via FTP.
Connecting to FTP Servers
•
Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 278)
•
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 281)
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to an FTP server via wireless LAN.
1
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING> CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose FTP TRANSFER.
2
Select CREATE NEW.
N
Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select
from a list of existing connection set-
ting pro les.
FTP TRANSFER
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
CREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST
3
Press MENU/OK when prompted.
NEXT BACK
SELECT COMM SETTING
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION
279
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
4
Select WIRELESS LAN.
SELECT COMM SETTING
TRANSFER IMAGES TO
FTP SERVER VIA WIRELESS LAN
WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING
5
Select CREATE NEW to create a new
communication setting pro le.
N
You can also select or edit existing pro-
les.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
6
Adjust wireless LAN settings.
•
ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-
ple Access Point Connections”
(P 264).
•
IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connect-
ing Using an IP Address” (P 265).
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
7
After adjusting wireless LAN settings,
select NEXT.
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
8
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
280
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
9
When prompted, press MENU/OK and
adjust settings for connection to the
FTP server (
P 285
).
NEXT BACK
FTP SERVER SETTING
SELECT CREATE NEW
IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN
CREATED
10
Save the connection setting pro le
when adjustments to settings are
complete.
Press MENU/OK.
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING
NEXT BACK
11
Select CREATE NEW.
CREATE NEW
US
B WEB
C
A
M
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
12
Name the connection setting pro le.
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
SET
281
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
13
Select OK to test the connection.
When a prompt is displayed stating
that the test was successful, press
MENU/OK.
N
If the test ends in failure, check the
communication setting pro le and
network settings.
NO
OK
TEST THE CONNECTION?
14
Choose SELECT to nish creating the
connection setting pro le.
N
The connection setting pro le can
also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING
FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"
SELECT
SKIP
SETTING COMPLETE
15
Upload pictures to the FTP server (
P 288
).
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to an FTP server via wired LAN (Ethernet).
1
Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into
the camera’s LAN connector.
2
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING> CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose FTP TRANSFER.
3
Select CREATE NEW.
N
Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select
from a list of existing connection set-
ting pro les.
FTP TRANSFER
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
CREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST
282
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
4
Press MENU/OK when prompted.
NEXT BACK
SELECT COMM SETTING
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION
5
Select WIRED LAN.
SELECT COMM SETTING
TRANSFER IMAGES TO
FTP SERVER VIA WIRED LAN
WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING
6
Select CREATE NEW to create a new
communication setting pro le.
N
You can also select or edit existing pro-
les.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
7
Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.
•
Select AUTO to use an IP address as-
signed by the network.
•
Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 265).
AUTOIP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
8
Select NEXT to proceed after adjust-
ing IP address settings.
AUTOIP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
283
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
9
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
10
When prompted, press MENU/OK and
adjust settings for connection to the
FTP server (
P 285
).
NEXT BACK
FTP SERVER SETTING
SELECT CREATE NEW
IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN
CREATED
11
Save the connection setting pro le
when adjustments to settings are
complete.
Press MENU/OK.
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING
NEXT BACK
12
Select CREATE NEW.
CREATE NEW
US
B WEB
C
AM
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
13
Name the connection setting pro le.
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
SET
284
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
14
Select OK to test the connection.
When a prompt is displayed stating
that the test was successful, press
MENU/OK.
N
If the test ends in failure, check the
communication setting pro le and
network settings.
NO
OK
TEST THE CONNECTION?
15
Choose SELECT to nish creating the
connection setting pro le.
N
The connection setting pro le can
also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING
FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"
SELECT
SKIP
SETTING COMPLETE
16
Upload pictures to the FTP server (
P 288
).
285
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers
Adjust settings for connection to the destination FTP server.
1
Select CREATE NEW in the FTP server
settings display.
N
You can also select or edit existing set-
tings.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
FTP SERVER SETTING
2
Choose an FTP server type.
SFTP
FTPS
FTP
FTP SERVER TYPE
3
Enter the FTP server address.
FTP SERVER ADDRESS
ENTER CANCEL
SET
4
Enter the FTP server port number.
PORT NUMBER
SET
ENTER CANCEL
286
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
5
Choose whether to use a proxy serv-
er.
In this case we’ll choose DISABLE.
N
Choose ENABLE to enter the address
and port number for a proxy server.
DISABLE
ENABLE
PROXY SERVER
6
Choose whether to enable PASV
mode.
DISABLE
ENABLE
PASSIVE MODE
7
Select USER NAME & PASSWORD.
Enter the user name and password
used for login to the FTP server.
N
•
For connection to servers that do not
require a user name and password,
select ANONYMOUS.
•
Selecting FTPS for FTP SERVER
TYPE lets you choose the authen-
tication method. If desired, you can
load a self-signed root certi cate
using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING>
ROOT CERTIFICATE.
USER NAME & PASSWORD
ANONYMOUS
LOGIN
8
Choose the destination folder.
•
Choose ROOT FOLDER to upload
pictures to the server’s root direc-
tory.
•
To select a di erent folder, choose
SPECIFY FOLDER.
SPECIFY FOLDER
ROOT FOLDER
SPECIFY TARGET FOLDER
287
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
9
Choose the procedure used when
the destination contains les with
the same names as the pictures se-
lected for upload.
•
Select YES to overwrite the existing
les.
•
Select NO to rename the uploaded
les by adding numbers at the ends
of the le names (e.g., “DSCF0001_
(0).JPG”).
NO
YES
OVERWRITE SAME FILE NAME
10
Name the FTP server settings.
The chosen name will appear in the
FTP server list.
FTP SERVER NAME
SET
288
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers
Select pictures for upload to an FTP server.
•
Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
(P 288)
•
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken (P 290)
•
Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback (P 290)
Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
1
Select FTP OPTIONAL SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.
2
Choose SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER.
SELECT IMAGE AND TRANSFER
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER
SELECT FILE TYPE
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
TO SELECTED FTP SERVER
3
Select TRANSFER.
N
If you choose PRIORITY TRANSFER,
any pictures you then select will be
uploaded to the FTP server before pic-
tures selected using TRANSFER.
SELECT IMAGE AND TRANSFER
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER
SELECT FILE TYPE
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
TO SELECTED FTP SERVER
S
ELE
C
T IMA
G
E
T
RAN
S
FE
R
C
APTI
O
N
F
S
ELE
C
T F
I
A
U
T
O
IMA
G
S
ELE
C
T I
M
TO
S
ELE
C
TED
F
A
R/
FO
IL
G
MA
FT
TRANSFER
PRIORITY TRANSFER
4
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
•
To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
that meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
•
To select all pictures, press the Q button.
•
Selecting any two pictures with the AEL button also selects
all pictures between them.
289
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
5
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be upload-
ed to the FTP server.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
BACK
Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
•
To display only pictures that meet selected cri-
teria, choose FILTERING.
•
To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
BACK
O
Switching slots or changing the lter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 pictures.
•
If ON is selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING> IMAGE TRANSFER
WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is
o .
290
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Uploading Files via FTP
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING>
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB setting
menu are automatically marked for upload.
Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback
If b FTP TRANSFER ORDER or c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER
ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> a Fn1
BUTTON SETTING, you can mark pictures for upload or change
or remove their upload marking using the Fn1 button during
playback.
291
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the
camera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4
Launch X RAW STUDIO.
RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.
N
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
292
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4
Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Acquire.
N
Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
293
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web
Browser
The camera supports remote movie recording. You can
connect to up to four cameras using a web browser on a
computer or tablet and record movies or adjust camera
settings.
Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser
You can connect to the camera from a web browser on a comput-
er or tablet and control it remotely.
Wired LAN
(Ethernet)/
wireless LAN
Wired LAN
(Ethernet)/
wireless LAN
Computer/tablet
Web browser
294
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Before recording movies remotely, you will need to create a con-
nection setting pro le for use when connecting the camera to a
computer or tablet via wireless or wired LAN.
•
Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 294)
•
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 299)
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Create a connection setting pro le for use when connecting the
camera to a computer or tablet via wireless LAN.
1
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING> CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose REMOTE REC FUNCTION.
2
Select CREATE NEW.
N
Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select
from a list of existing connection set-
ting pro les.
REMOTE REC FUNCTION
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
CREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST
3
Press MENU/OK when prompted.
NEXT BACK
SELECT COMM SETTING
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION
4
Select WIRELESS LAN.
SELECT COMM SETTING
CONNECT TO NETWORK
VIA WIRELESS LAN
WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
295
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
5
Select CREATE NEW to create a new
connection setting pro le.
N
You can also select or edit existing pro-
les.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
6
Adjust wireless LAN settings.
•
ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-
ple Access Point Connections”
(P 264).
•
IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connect-
ing Using an IP Address” (P 265).
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
N
We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point
(for example, one that operates in the 5GHz band).
7
After adjusting wireless LAN settings,
select NEXT.
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
8
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
296
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
9
Create a user name and password for
use when connecting to the camera
from a computer or tablet.
Press MENU/OK.
NEXT BACK
USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING
USER NAME & PASSWORD IS
REQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER
10
Enter a user name.
USER NAME
SET
ENTER CANCEL
11
Enter a password.
PASSWORD
SET
ENTER CANCEL
12
Choose a server type.
N
If you choose HTTPS, you will need
to import a root certi cate into the
browser on your computer or tablet
(P 298).
HTTPS
HTTP
SERVER TYPE
13
The camera will display the settings
you selected.
Press MENU/OK.
N
You will need this information when
connecting to the camera from a com-
puter or tablet.
END EDIT
USER NAME
PASSWORD
SERVER TYPE
297
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
14
Save the connection setting pro le.
Press MENU/OK.
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING
NEXT BACK
15
Select CREATE NEW.
CREATE NEW
US
B WEB
C
AM
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
16
Name the connection setting pro le.
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
SET
17
Choose SELECT.
N
The connection setting pro le can
also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING
FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"
SELECT
SKIP
SETTING COMPLETE
18
Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303).
298
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting via HTTPS
If you selected HTTPS for SERVER TYPE, you will need to import a root
certi cate into the browser on your computer or tablet. Instructions on
downloading and installing a root certi cate are available from the follow-
ing website:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/rootcer/
299
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Create a connection setting pro le for use when connecting the
camera to a computer or tablet via wired LAN (Ethernet).
1
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING> CREATE
USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and
choose REMOTE REC FUNCTION.
2
Select CREATE NEW.
N
Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select
from a list of existing connection set-
ting pro les.
REMOTE REC FUNCTION
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
CREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST
3
Press MENU/OK when prompted.
NEXT BACK
SELECT COMM SETTING
SELECT COMM SETTING
TO USE THIS FUNCTION
4
Select WIRED LAN.
SELECT COMM SETTING
CONNECT TO NETWORK
VIA WIRELESS LAN
WIRELESS LAN
WIRED LAN
5
Select CREATE NEW to create a new
communication setting pro le.
N
You can also select or edit existing pro-
les.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
300
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
6
Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.
•
Select AUTO to use an IP address as-
signed by the network.
•
Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in
“Connecting Using an IP Address”
(P 265).
AUTOIP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
7
Select NEXT to proceed after adjust-
ing IP address settings.
AUTOIP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT
8
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
9
Create a user name and password for
use when connecting to the camera
from a computer or tablet.
Press MENU/OK.
NEXT BACK
USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING
USER NAME & PASSWORD IS
REQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER
10
Enter a user name.
USER NAME
SET
ENTER CANCEL
301
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
11
Enter a password.
PASSWORD
SET
ENTER CANCEL
12
Choose a server type.
N
If you choose HTTPS, you will need
to import a root certi cate into the
browser on your computer or tablet
(P 298).
HTTPS
HTTP
SERVER TYPE
13
The camera will display the settings
you selected.
Press MENU/OK.
N
You will need this information when
connecting to the camera from a com-
puter or tablet.
END EDIT
USER NAME
PASSWORD
SERVER TYPE
14
Save the connection setting pro le.
Press MENU/OK.
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING
NEXT BACK
15
Select CREATE NEW.
CREATE NEW
US
B WEB
C
AM
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
302
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
16
Name the connection setting pro le.
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
SET
17
Choose SELECT.
N
The connection setting pro le can
also be selected later using SELECT
CONNECTION SETTING.
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING
FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"
SELECT
SKIP
SETTING COMPLETE
18
Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303).
303
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet
Connect to the camera from a web browser on a computer or
tablet.
N
We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point (for
example, one that operates in the 5GHz band).
Connecting the fi rst camera
Connect by using a web browser to enter the IP address or using
a camera app to scan the QR code displayed by the camera.
Connecting using an IP address
Connecting using an IP address
1
Select INFORMATION> HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
The IP address of the camera is displayed.
2
Launch a web browser on your com-
puter or tablet and enter the cam-
era’s IP address in the address bar.
To connect to a camera with an IP
address of 192.168.0.11, for example,
enter “http://192.168.0.11”.
XXXXXXXXX.........
3
An entry screen appears. Enter the
user name and password.
The remote recording display will ap-
pear in the browser.
Please sign-in to the camera
USER NAME:
PASSWORD:
OK Cancel
304
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Connecting by scanning a QR code
Connecting by scanning a QR code
1
Select INFORMATION> HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
A QR code is displayed.
2
Launch the camera application on the tablet and scan the
QR code.
The web browser launches, and the remote recording display
appears.
Connecting a second or subsequent camera
Either enter the IP address in the remote recording display in the
web browser or scan the QR code to connect.
N
When you connect a second or subsequent camera, set the same
SERVER TYPE as the rst camera beforehand (P 298).
Connecting using an IP address
Connecting using an IP address
1
Select INFORMATION> HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
The IP address of the camera is displayed.
2
Click or tap the thumbnail of the +
mark in the “Choose camera” area of
the remote recording display.
3
An entry screen appears. Enter the
camera’s IP address and an account
name and password.
The remote recording display will ap-
pear in the browser.
Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in
Address:
PASSWORD:
PASSWO
PASS
ASSWO
PASSWO
S
USER NAME
E
E
E
:
OK Cancel
Connect via QR Code
305
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Connecting by scanning a QR code
Connecting by scanning a QR code
N
To connect a second or subsequent camera by scanning a QR code, set
SERVER TYPE of the rst camera and second and subsequent cameras
to HTTPS in advance.
1
Select INFORMATION> HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
A QR code is displayed.
2
Tap the thumbnail of the + mark in
the “Choose camera” area.
3
Tap “Connect via QR Code” to scan
the QR code displayed by the cam-
era.
The remote recording display will ap-
pear in the browser.
Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in
Address:
PASSWORD:
PASSWO
PASSWO
PASSW
PASSWO
S
USER NAME
E
E
:
OK Cancel
Connect via QR Code
Disconnecting a second or subsequent camera
To end a connection after adding a camera, select the “remove connected
device” option in the “Remote recording” menu and click or tap the thumb-
nail for the camera you want to remove.
306
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
The Remote Recording Display
The controls available in the remote recording display are de-
tailed below.
N
The display layout varies with the size of the computer or tablet screen,
among other factors.
Overview
CDEGH
A
FI
J
K
A
B
307
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Item
Item
Description
Description
A
Camera settings Adjust settings for the current camera.
B
Choose for REC/STOP
Choose the camera or cameras to which the
selected action (starting or stopping recording)
will apply.
C
STOP button Stop movie recording.
D
REC button Start movie recording.
E
Choose camera
A list of thumbnails showing the views through
the lenses of the connected cameras. Click or
tap a thumbnail to select a camera to control.
F
Check button for movies in
memory card
View the movies on the memory card in the
current camera.
G
Camera settings (advanced)
Adjust (advanced) settings for the current
camera.
H
Screen lock button
Enable or disable the controls in the remote
recording display.
I
Display mode button Switch displays.
J
Remote recording menu
Adjust remote recording settings (P 309).
K
Camera lock button
Lock or unlock the current camera, enabling or
disabling its controls.
N
If you end the connection to a camera while it is locked, its controls will
remain disabled, in which case you will need to turn the camera o .
308
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Choose Camera
The views through the lenses of the connected cameras are
shown in a thumbnail list. Click or tap a thumbnail to select a
camera to control.
CD
A
B
B
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Recording time available
The remaining recording time. When the time
remaining grows short, the thumbnail will fl ash
and the recording time will be displayed in red.
B
Card slot options
Camera storage settings. The icon for the
current slot is shown in orange. The display
turns red if the camera is unable to record to
the current card.
C
Battery level
The battery level. The thumbnail will fl ash
when the battery runs low.
D
Thumbnail frame
A frame appears around the thumbnail for the
current camera. Regardless of whether they are
currently selected, cameras that are currently
recording are highlighted in red or, during
high-speed recording, in green.
309
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Remote Recording Menu
Adjust remote recording settings.
Show histogram
Show histogram
Hide or view the histogram.
Show microphone level
Show microphone level
Hide or view the microphone recording level.
Show WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Show WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Hide or view the waveform/vectorscope (P 190).
Show tool bar
Show tool bar
Hide or view the browser toolbar.
Display with Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority
Display with Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority
Choose how you prefer the view through the lens to be dis-
played, giving priority either to image quality or to ensuring that
the picture updates in real time.
N
•
Prioritizing image quality maximizes image quality but may result in
display lag.
•
Prioritizing real-time display keeps display lag to a minimum regard-
less of such factors as connection speed.
Light mode/Dark mode
Light mode/Dark mode
Switch between the light- and dark-mode remote recording dis-
plays.
Stop the camera connection
Stop the camera connection
Click or tap a thumbnail in the “Choose camera” area to end the
connection to the selected camera.
310
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Recording Movies Remotely
Start recording on one or more remote cameras or end recording
on selected cameras without ending recording on others.
1
The cameras to which the chosen action (starting or stop-
ping recording) will apply can be selected in the “Choose for
REC/STOP” area.
Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the
“Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selected
cameras will be highlighted.
2
Click or tap the “REC button”.
The selected cameras will start recording and their thumb-
nails will be highlighted in color.
3
To end recording, select the desired cameras in the “Choose
for REC/STOP” area.
Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the
“Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selected
cameras will be highlighted.
4
Click or tap the “STOP button”.
The selected cameras will stop recording.
Viewing Movies
View movies recorded to the camera memory card.
1
Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2
Click or tap the “Check button for movies in memory card”.
The les on the camera memory card will be displayed.
311
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Saving and Loading Camera Settings
Save settings for connected cameras to the computer or tablet or
load previously-saved settings.
Saving Camera Settings
Save camera settings to a settings le on the computer or tablet.
1
Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2
Select “Backup” in the “Camera set-
tings (advanced)” menu.
Backup
3
Click or tap “Save settings”.
Settings for the selected camera will be saved to a settings
le on the computer or tablet.
Loading Saved Settings
Load saved settings onto a selected camera.
1
Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2
Select “Restore” in the “Camera set-
tings (advanced)” menu.
Restore
3
Select the desired settings le and click or tap “Load settings”.
The settings will be copied to the selected camera.
N
•
The location and procedure for loading les varies with the computer
or tablet.
•
Only les created with cameras of the same type can be used.
312
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser
Copying Settings to Other Cameras
Settings can be copied to multiple cameras simultaneously.
1
Select the source camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2
Select “Copy” in the “Camera settings
(advanced)” menu.
Copy
3
Select the destination cameras and
click or tap “Copy”.
The settings currently in e ect on the
source camera will be copied to the
destination cameras.
Copy
N
Only les created with cameras of the same type can be used.
313
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings from
the shooting or playback display, press
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB
setting) tab.
EXIT
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
NETWORK/USB SETTING
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
Create or edit connection setting pro les.
CREATE USING WIZARD
Choose network/USB and communication settings for a connec-
tion setting pro le.
1
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING> CREATE USING WIZARD
in the network/USB setting menu.
EDIT/CHECK
CREATE USING WIZARD
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
314
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
2
Choose the desired network/USB set-
tings.
TETHER SHOOTING
PRINTER PRINT
WEBCAM
USB CARD READER
SMARTPHONE APP
CONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP
CREATE USING WIZARD
N
To use any of the following pre-existing connection setting pro-
les, choose SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
•
1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
•
2: USB CARD READER
•
3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
•
4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
•
5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
•
6: USB WEBCAM
3
Select CREATE NEW.
Choosing a tethered photography
option displays the options shown.
To create a new pro le, select CREATE
NEW.
SELECT FROM LIST
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD
TETHER SHOOTING
4
Adjust network/USB settings.
For more information, refer to the section on the setting in
question.
•
“Tethered Photography” (P 260)
•
“Uploading Pictures via FTP“ (P 278)
•
“Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser“ (P 293)
N
Saved connection setting pro les are marked by icons indicating the
communication setting pro le.
315
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
EDIT/CHECK
View or edit existing connection setting pro les.
N
The instructions that follow are devoted chie y to choosing commu-
nication settings for connection setting pro les used in tethered pho-
tography.
1
Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING> EDIT/CHECK in the net-
work/USB setting menu.
EDIT/CHECK
CREATE USING WIZARD
EDIT AND CHECK EXISTING
CONNECTION SETTING
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
2
Choose a connection setting pro le.
N
Options 1 to 6 (1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
to 6: USB WEBCAM) are not available.
NO
T
C
REATE
D
NISHIAZABU STUDIO
US
B WEB
C
AM
US
B RAW
CO
NV.
/
BA
C
K
U
P RE
S
T
O
R
E
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
FIXE
D
US
B TETHER
S
H
OO
TIN
G
A
U
T
O
US
B
C
ARD READER
U
NIVER
S
AL
S
ETTIN
G
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
3
Select EDIT/CHECK.
•
To copy an existing connection set-
ting pro le, select COPY. Choosing
an existing pro le as the destina-
tion overwrites the pro le selected
in Step 2.
NISHIAZABU STUDIO
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
NO
N
I
S
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
U
N
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
T CREATED
SH
B
B
B
B
B
I
V
N
COPY
CONNECTION TEST
EDIT / CHECK
ERASE
•
To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST.
•
To delete the selected connection setting pro le, select
ERASE.
316
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
4
Select COMM SETTING.
2:
REM
O
TE RE
C
F
U
N
C
T
O
IN
S
ETTIN
G
F
TP
S
ERVER
S
ETTIN
G
COMM SETTING
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
FINISH
WiFi_STUDIO
7: STUDIO_TETHER
N
•
To rename the connection setting pro le, select EDIT
CONNECTION SETTING NAME.
•
If the chosen connection setting pro le is for FTP upload, select
FTP SERVER SETTING to view or edit settings for connection to
the FTP server (P 285).
•
If the chosen connection setting pro le is for the remote record
function, select REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING to view or
edit settings for remote movie recording (P 296, 301).
5
Choose an existing communication
setting pro le.
N
To create a new pro le, select CREATE
NEW.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
6
Select EDIT/CHECK.
•
To save the selected communica-
tion setting pro le to the current
connection setting pro le, choose
SELECT.
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
WIFI_5
WIFI_4
WIFI_3
WIFI_2
WIFI_1
USB
COMM SETTING
C
RE
A
C
RE
A
WIFI
_
WIFI
_
WIFI
_
WIFI
_
WIFI
_
US
B
COMM SETTING
ATE NEW
AT
_5
_4
_3
_2
_1
TIN
COPY
SELECT
ERASE
EDIT / CHECK
CONNECTION TEST
•
To copy an existing communication setting pro le, select
COPY. Choosing an existing pro le as the destination over-
writes the pro le selected in Step 5.
•
To delete the selected communication setting pro le, se-
lect ERASE. Deleting a communication setting pro le saved
to a connection setting pro le also deletes the connection
setting pro le.
•
To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST.
317
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
7
Review the settings displayed and se-
lect END to proceed without making
changes. To edit settings, press the
focus stick (focus lever) to the right.
You can now edit the communica-
tion setting pro le as described in
“Simple Access Point Connections”
(P 264) and “Connecting Using an
IP Address” (P 265).
123456789
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
ABCDEFGHIJK
WIFI_ODAIBA_MC32:
END EDIT
NETWORK TYPE
SECURITY TYPE
SSID
IP ADDRESS SETTING
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY ADDRESS
DNS SERVER ADDRESS
WIRELESS LAN
WPA3
MANUAL
8
After editing the communication set-
ting pro le, select NEXT.
NEXT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ACCESS POINT SETTING
WIRELESS LAN
9
Name the communication setting
pro le.
COMM SETTING NAME
ENTER CANCEL
SET
10
Choose SELECT to save the edited
communication setting pro le to the
current connection setting pro le.
8: WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3
SELECT
SKIP
SELECT THIS COMM SETTING?
11
Select FINISH to end editing.
2:
REM
O
TE RE
C
F
U
N
C
T
O
IN
S
ETTIN
G
F
TP
S
ERVER
S
ETTIN
G
COMM SETTING
EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
FINISH
WiFi_STUDIO
7: STUDIO_TETHER
318
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
Select a connection setting pro le.
Pro le
Pro le
Description
Description
1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
Connect using the smartphone app or print pictures on
instax printers.
2: USB CARD READER
2: USB CARD READER
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone via
USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
3: USB TETHER
3: USB TETHER
SHOOTING AUTO
SHOOTING AUTO
Control the camera and take photographs remotely.
•
Select 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO to au-
tomatically enable tethered photography when the
computer to which the camera is connected is turned
on. Tethered photography is disabled while the com-
puter is off .
•
If 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected,
the camera will continue to function in tethered pho-
tography mode even when not connected to a com-
puter.
4: USB TETHER
4: USB TETHER
SHOOTING FIXED
SHOOTING FIXED
5: USB RAW CONV./
5: USB RAW CONV./
BACKUP RESTORE
BACKUP RESTORE
Harness the power of the camera’s image processing en-
gine when processing RAW pictures on a computer, or
save or load camera settings.
6: USB WEBCAM
6: USB WEBCAM
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
webcam.
7–16: User-created
7–16: User-created
pro les
pro les
Use network/USB settings saved using CREATE/EDIT
CONNECTION SETTING.
319
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
Choosing a Connection Setting Profi le
Follow the steps below to use pre-existing or user-created con-
nection setting pro les.
1
Choose SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.
7:STUDIO
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
NETWORK/USB SETTING
EXIT
2
Choose the desired connection set-
ting pro le.
NISHIAZABU STUDIO
USB WEBCAM
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB CARD READER
UNIVERSAL SETTING
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetooth
features.
Options
Options
ON OFF
320
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smart-
phone-related settings.
N
Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the
smartphone app.
PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smart-
phone app has been installed.
SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the cam-
era has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
DELETE PAIRING REG.
Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.
N
The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.
Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than the
smartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.
321
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect with
paired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
Options
ON OFF
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.
Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data from
paired smartphones or tablets.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app is
running. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have not
been updated for over 30 minutes.
NAME
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless
network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).
322
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures to
paired smartphones or tablets even while o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE
Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing le
size for upload.
Options
Options
ON
T
ON
U
OFF
N
•
The pictures on the camera memory card are not a ected.
•
Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M. When
the setting is ON
T
or ON
U
, images are compressed to about 12
megapixels or 6 megapixels, respectively. The size after compression
di ers by the aspect ratio of the image.
WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING
Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n) 5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)
O
•
Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels
in the 5GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2GHz (W52) band is
permitted before selecting the 5GHz option.
•
The options available vary with the country or region of sale.
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be
uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF.
323
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to optional Fuji lm instax SHARE
printers.
The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
“1111”. If you have already chosen a di erent
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Adjust settings for use with Frame.io.
CONNECT
Connect to Frame.io.
Option
Option
Description
Description
WIRELESS LAN Connect via wireless LAN.
WIRED LAN Connect via wired LAN.
GET PAIRING CODE
View the pairing code for connection to the Frame.io proj-
ect.
N
The pairing code can only be viewed when the camera is connected
to Frame.io.
DISCONNECT
End the connection to the Frame.io project and terminate the
network connection.
324
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of les uploaded to Frame.io. You can select or
deselect each le type individually.
Options
Options
MOV - PROXY MOV - ProRes OTHER MOV/MP4 JPEG
RAW HEIF TIFF
UPLOAD SETTING
Adjust settings Frame.io upload settings.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload.
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark photos and movies for upload
as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume upload to Frame.io.
Options
Options
TRANSFER SUSPEND
325
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, upload of les to Frame.io will continue while
the camera is o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATE
ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a root certi cate to the camera for use with Frame.io.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOAD FROM STORAGE
MEDIA
Copy the root certifi cate from the camera memory card.
DELETE Delete the current root certifi cate.
N
Frame.io and FTP OPTIONAL SETTING> ROOT CERTIFICATE use the
same root certi cate. Changing one changes the other.
UPLOAD STATUS
View Frame.io upload status.
TRANSFER QUEUE
View a list of the les awaiting upload.
RESET TRANSFER ORDER
Remove upload marking from all les selected for upload to
Frame.io.
326
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
Adjust settings for FTP upload.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload (P 288).
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark pictures for upload as they are
taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of les uploaded to the FTP server. You can se-
lect or deselect each le type individually.
Options
Options
JPEG RAW HEIF TIFF MOV MP4
CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER
Add captions to photos and movies during upload.
Option
Option
Description
Description
DEFAULT CAPTION
Add the caption selected for D SAVE DATA SETTING>
DEFAULT CAPTION.
CREATED CAPTION Create new captions or select existing captions.
NO CAPTION Do not add captions to pictures during upload.
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume FTP upload.
Options
Options
TRANSFER SUSPEND
327
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, upload of pictures to the FTP server will contin-
ue while the camera is o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
FTP POWER SAVING
If ON is selected, the network feature will turn o to save power
when the upload of all pictures currently marked for transfer is
complete. Marking additional pictures for upload turns the net-
work feature on again.
Options
Options
ON OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a unique root certi cate to the camera for use when FTPS is
selected for FTP SERVER TYPE (P 285).
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOAD FROM MEMORY
CARD
Copy the root certifi cate from the camera memory card.
DELETE Delete the current root certifi cate.
N
FTP upload and Frame.io Camera to Cloud> UPLOAD SETTING>
ROOT CERTIFICATE use the same root certi cate. Changing one
changes the other.
RESET FTP TRANSFER ORDER
Remove upload marking from all pictures selected for upload to
the FTP server in the current connection setting pro le.
328
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,
or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
The camera switches between power delivery and data trans-
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/
COMM OFF
The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
the drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY
OFF/COMM ON
The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
the connected device.
O
The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from
devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM
ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.
N
Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the
camera is o .
329
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
INFORMATION
View network-related settings.
Option
Option
Description
Description
HARDWARE INFO
View the camera’s wireless and wired LAN Mac addresses and
IP addresses, and Bluetooth MAC address.
TRANSFER ORDER
STATUS
View upload progress and the destination for fi les uploaded to
Frame.io or via FTP.
ERROR
DESCRIPTION
View the content of errors when a C or B icon is displayed
(P 457).
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING
Reset network/USB settings to default values.
330
MEMO
331
The Setup Menus
332
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and
choose USER SETTING.
USER SETTING
FORMAT
DATE/TIME
bAREA SETTING
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
TIME DIFFERENCE
EXIT
FORMAT
To format a memory card or USB-connected SSD:
1
Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
2
Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and
press MENU/OK.
N
An SSD connected to the USB connector can also be selected.
3
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
N
To exit without formatting the memory
card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.
OK
CANCEL
FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?
ERASE ALL DATA
FORMAT
O
•
All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the
memory card. Be sure important les have been copied to a comput-
er or other storage device.
•
Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
N
The format menu can also be displayed by pressing and holding
the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the
b(Delete) button.
333
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Daylight saving time on.
OFF Daylight saving time off .
DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:
1
Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. To change the order in which the year, month, and
day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the
focus stick up or down.
3
Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
334
The Setup Menus
9
TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
di erence between your local and home time zone:
O
Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before select-
ing a local time zone using g LOCAL.
1
Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local time
zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.
N
Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
Options
g LOCAL h HOME
N
If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three
seconds when the camera is turned on.
335
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 377).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 377).
336
The Setup Menus
9
SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OK Clean the sensor immediately.
WHEN SWITCHED ON
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
turned on.
WHEN SWITCHED OFF
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-
era turns off in playback mode).
N
Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 438).
BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as a
number between 0 and 4. The higher the
number, the older the battery.
BATTERY AGE
N
The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that
batteries be replaced as they wear out.
337
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.
1
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STILL MENU RESET
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
MOVIE MENU RESET
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
SET-UP RESET
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
INITIALIZE
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
default values.
2
A con rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK.
REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certi cates, select D USER SETTING> REGULATORY in the
setup menu.
338
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.
SOUND SETTING
AF BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
FREC START/STOP VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
EXIT
AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
339
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-
trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or
electronic front-curtain shutter.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
340
The Setup Menus
9
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
Options
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
341
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
Options
Options
012345678910
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
XLR
The camera plays audio recorded via external micro-
phones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.
CAMERA
The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via the
microphone jack.
N
You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by
pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).
342
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.
SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING
EVF COLOR
EVF BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
EXIT
VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic view nder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 20).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic view nder.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
MANUAL
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.
EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic view nder.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
343
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic view nder.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick
(focus lever).
SET CANCEL
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
2
Press MENU/OK.
344
The Setup Menus
9
LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
2
Press MENU/OK.
345
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
1.5 SEC
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
0.5 SEC
OFF Pictures are not displayed after shooting.
N
•
Colors may di er slightly from those in the nal image.
•
“Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the view nder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
Options
ON OFF
346
The Setup Menus
9
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
PREVIEW WB
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a fl ash during daylight.
OFF
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-
tion in situations in which both exposure and white balance
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a fl ash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the e ects of lm simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The eff ects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-
to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will diff er from
those in the fi nal picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the eff ects of monochrome and sepia settings.
OFF
The eff ects of fi lm simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.
347
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to
BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
Options
ON OFF
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 27).
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
Option
F GRID 9 G GRID 24 H HD FRAMING
Display
P P
P
For “rule of thirds” compo-
sition.
A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the
crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.
N
Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 25).
348
The Setup Menus
9
AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
Options
ON OFF
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION
Choose the zoom ratio selected when the center of the rear com-
mand dial is pressed during playback.
Option
Option
Description
Description
2x (FROM CENTER)
View the center area of the picture at the selected zoom
ratio. Regardless of the setting selected, pictures will not be
displayed at greater than actual size.
4x (FROM CENTER)
8x (FROM CENTER)
ACTUAL SIZE
(FROM FOCUS POINT)
View the picture at actual size, centered on the focus area.
The zoom ratio varies with the size of the image.
PREVIOUS MAG.
(FROM CENTER)
Display each picture at the same zoom ratio as the previous
picture, starting at the center of the image. Pictures will not,
however, be displayed at greater than actual size.
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
Options
METERS FEET
349
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
Option
Option
Description
Description
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
R:FRAME L:FOCUS
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION
Choose the magni cation of the full-screen EVF display.
Options
Options
1.00x 0.94x 0.89x 0.83x
N
The screen magni cation cannot be changed when D POWER
MANAGEMENT> PERFORMANCE is either EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (120P) or EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.). With
these settings, the screen magni cation is set to 0.77x.
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display
(P 25).
350
The Setup Menus
9
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic view nd-
er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
OFF ON
O
Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 17).
N
If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and o (OFF) (P 385).
351
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-
dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
OFF ON
O
Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 19).
N
If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and o (OFF) (P 385).
352
The Setup Menus
9
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP>
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).
R2
R1
L4
L3
L2
L1
Scale
Expo. DISP.
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
A
Expo. DISP.
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
B
d Scale
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
C
L1, L2, L3, L4
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
of the screen.
D
R1, R2, R3, R4
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
side of the screen.
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
Option
Option
Description
Description
HIGH CONTRAST High contrast.
STANDARD Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.
353
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smart-
phone.
Options
Options
ON OFF
SUB MONITOR SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor.
Separate displays are available for still photography and movie
recording. Choose from the following:
Option
Option
Description
Description
INFORMATION
Display camera settings. You can choose the settings
displayed.
DIALS Display dials showing ISO sensitivity and shutter speed.
HISTOGRAM Display a histogram.
N
You can switch between displays by pressing the secondary LCD mon-
itor mode button.
The INFORMATION Display
Follow the steps below to choose the indicators shown in the
INFORMATION display.
1
Select D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR SETTING in the
setup menu.
2
Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight INFORMATION and press
MENU/OK.
INFORMATION
DIALS
HISTOGRAM
SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL)
354
The Setup Menus
9
4
Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
SUB MONITOR SETTING
INFORMATION(STILL)
d
Scale
SHUTTER SPEED
ISO
APERTURE
SHOOTING MODE
IMAGE SIZE
FILM SIMULATION
WHITE BALANCE
5
Highlight the indicator you wish to
display and press MENU/OK.
ISO
WHITE BALANCE
NONE
APERTURE
SHUTTER SPEED
EXPO. COMP.
DISPLAY 1 SETTING
Still Photography Mode
Still Photography Mode
Choose from:
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
•
EXPO. COMP.
•
ISO
•
SHOOTING MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
DRIVE MODE
•
FOCUS MODE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
35mm FORMAT MODE
•
BOOST MODE
•
DUAL IS MODE
•
SELF-TIMER
•
COMMUNICATION STATUS
•
NONE
355
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
Movie Mode
Movie Mode
Choose from:
•
TIME CODE
•
REMAINING TIME/REC. TIME
•
REMAINING TIME
•
REC. TIME
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
•
EXPO. COMP.
•
ISO
•
SHOOTING MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
FOCUS MODE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
IMAGE FORMAT
•
BOOST MODE
•
DUAL IS MODE
•
SELF-TIMER
•
COMMUNICATION STATUS
•
NONE
6
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to change additional indicators.
N
The d Scale indicator can only be enabled
or disabled.
d Scale
356
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor
according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read.
Option
Option
Description
Description
BLACK Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting.
WHITE Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting.
N
The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD moni-
tor backlight is on.
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
Options
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK
357
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
F
x
o S.S.
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
OPERATION
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
EXIT
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever).
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK (OFF) The focus stick cannot be used during shooting.
PUSH n TO UNLOCK
Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick
to select a focus point.
ON
Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus
point.
x
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still pho-
tography (P 379).
F
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when lming
movies (P 379).
358
The Setup Menus
9
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 385).
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose the roles played by the command dials.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 1
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aper-
ture (APERTURE)
*
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 2
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aper-
ture (APERTURE)
*
, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE
COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE)
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3.
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3
REAR COMMAND
DIAL
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aper-
ture (APERTURE)
*
, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE
COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to
the rear command dial.
EXP. COMPENSATION
ASSIGNMENT
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using either or
both of the front and rear command dials while the function
button assigned to exposure compensation is pressed.
* Aperture ring rotated to A or C in mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).
N
•
COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and
holding the center of the front command dial.
•
You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT
COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3.
359
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
o S.S. OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed ne-tuning using the com-
mand dials.
Options
Options
ON OFF
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option
Option
Description
Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.
SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AF-S
•
ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
•
OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
AF-C
•
ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
•
OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
360
The Setup Menus
9
SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be ad-
justed separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual fo-
cus).
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
taken in burst mode.
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-
tached.
Options
Options
ON OFF
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to
test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be
displayed.
OFF
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.
361
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS RING
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-
crease the focus distance.
Options
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)
FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-
ment of the focus ring.
Option
Option
Description
Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
LINEAR
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is ro-
tated, but the focusing speed is unaff ected by the speed the ring
is rotated.
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AE&AF ON WHEN
PRESSING
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
AE&AF ON/OFF
SWITCH
Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-
main locked until it is pressed again.
362
The Setup Menus
9
AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance
(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at
the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AWB ON WHEN
PRESSING
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
AWB ON/OFF
SWITCH
Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING
Control the behavior of the rear command dial and the button
to which exposure compensation is assigned. If
d
ON WHEN
PRESSING is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted
by holding the button while rotating dial; if
d
ON/OFF SWITCH
is selected, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the
button once, rotating the dial, and then pressing the button
again.
Options
Options
d ON WHEN PRESSING d ON/OFF SWITCH
363
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
Option
Option
Description
Description
a SMARTPHONE
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for transfer. If the
camera is not currently paired with a smartphone, Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be displayed.
d SELECT &
SMARTPHONE
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be
selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
is paired (P 233). If the camera is not currently paired with
a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
b FTP
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to an
FTP server.
c FTP PRIORITY
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority upload
to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the
upload queue.
HFrame.io
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to
Frame.io.
r WIRELESS
COMMUNICATION
The button can be used for wireless connections.
364
The Setup Menus
9
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
OFF Touch zoom disabled.
c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Enable touch-function gestures.
OFF Disable touch-function gestures.
a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
365
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the view nder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option
Option
Description
Description
6
All.
0
Right half.
2
Top right quarter.
4
Bottom right quarter.
1
Left half.
3
Top left quarter.
5
Bottom left quarter.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK SETTING
Choose from the following:
•
UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
•
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
SELECTION list.
•
SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION
SELECTION
Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
chosen for LOCK SETTING.
N
The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any
time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the
controls, press and hold the button again.
366
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.
POWER MANAGEMENT
PERFORMANCE
AUTO POWER OFF
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
SHOOTING STAND BY MODE
AUTO POWER SAVE
EXIT
AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns o automati-
cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned o
manually.
Options
Options
5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF
367
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and EVF display performance.
Option
Option
Description
Description
BOOST
Boost camera focus and EVF display performance. The battery
drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
You can choose to assign priority to:
•
AF PRIORITY - NORMAL: Focus speed.
•
AF PRIORITY - LOW LIGHT: Focus speed while adjusting EVF
and LCD brightness to make objects in shadows easier to see.
Some ghosting may be visible with blurred images.
•
EVF RESOLUTION PRIORITY: Viewfi nder resolution.
•
EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P): The refresh rate for the
EVF is increased, smoothing motion.
•
EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.): The refresh rate
for the EVF is increased beyond EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY
(120P) smoothing motion still further. The EVF may darken.
N
•
Regardless of the option selected, the camera func-
tions in AF PRIORITY - NORMAL mode while the
monitor is on.
•
The D SCREEN SET-UP> EVF FULL SCREEN
MAGNIFICATION setting cannot be changed when
either EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) or EVF
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.) is set. With
these settings, the screen magni cation is set to
0.77x.
NORMAL
Choose for standard focus and EVF display performance and bat-
tery endurance.
368
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
SHOOTING STAND BY MODE
Choose the delay before the camera enters shooting standby
mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
5 MIN
The camera will suspend all functions and enter power-
ing-saving (standby) mode if no operations are performed
for the selected period.
2 MIN
1 MIN
30 SEC
15 SEC
OFF Shooting standby mode disabled.
AUTO POWER SAVE
If ON is selected, the display frame rate will drop to save power if
no operations are performed for a short period, but the normal
frame rate can be restored by operating camera controls.
Options
Options
ON OFF
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will rst
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, auto-
matically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns o automatically.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STANDARD
The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
reaches the STANDARD value.
HIGH
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than
the STANDARD value, extending the time available to
record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could result
in low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.
369
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to le management settings.
To access le management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.
SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
xCARD SLOT SETTING
EDIT FILE NAME
COPYRIGHT INFO
DEFAULT CAPTION
IPTC
SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDER
EXIT
FRAME NO.
New pictures are stored in image les named
using a four-digit le number assigned by
adding one to the last le number used. The
le number is displayed during playback as
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether le num-
bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS
Numbering continues from the last fi le number used or the fi rst
available fi le number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate fi le names.
RENEW
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
memory card is inserted.
N
•
If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be
disabled. Turn the camera o and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
•
Selecting
D
USER SETTING> RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the le number.
•
Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may di er.
Frame number
Directory
number
File
number
370
The Setup Menus
9
EDIT FILE NAME
Change the le name pre x. sRGB images use a four-letter pre x
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter pre x (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option
Option
Default pre x
Default pre x
Sample le name
Sample le name
sRGB DSCF ABCD0001
AdobeRGB _DSF _ABC0001
x CARD SLOT SETTING
Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SEQUENTIAL
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the
fi rst slot is full.
BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
SEPARATE
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the fi rst slot and
JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This op-
tion only takes eff ect when SUPER FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW
or NORMAL+RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY.
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to rst when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
Options
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
371
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SELECT FOLDER
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to
highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
CREATE FOLDER
Enter a fi ve-character folder name. The new folder will be
created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.
COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are re ected only in images taken after the changes are made.
Option
Option
Description
Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not aff ected.
372
The Setup Menus
9
DEFAULT CAPTION
Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies.
DISPLAY
View the current caption.
EDIT
Enter a caption.
ERASE
Delete the current caption.
IPTC
Choose IPTC metadata applied to new photos.
EMBED IPTC
If ON is selected, IPTC metadata is embedded in new photos.
Options
Options
ON OFF
EDIT/CHECK
Enter IPTC metadata or check IPTC metadata that is currently reg-
istered.
RESET
Delete metadata that is currently registered.
373
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
374
MEMO
375
Shortcuts
376
Shortcuts
10
Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-
tom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-func-
tion gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option
Shortcut Option
Description
Description
P
P
“My menu”
Add frequently-used options to this custom
menu, which can be viewed by pressing
MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
377
The Quick Menu
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Qbutton.
Use the Q menu to view or change the options
selected for frequently-used menu items.
379
The function buttons
Use the function buttons for direct access to
selected features.
385
Touch-function
gestures
Use touch function button fl ick gestures (T-Fn1,
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to
selected features.
390
377
Shortcuts
10
MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the
shooting display and select the
E
(MY
MENU) tab.
EXIT
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
SHUTTER TYPE
GRAIN EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
SELF-TIMER
MY MENU
PHOTOMETRY
O
The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:
1
In the setup menu, select D USER
SETTING> x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.
N
To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.
To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.
MY MENU SETTING
ADD ITEMS
RANK ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and
press MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.
OK
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
RAW RECORDING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
xMY MENU SETTING
CANCELSELECT
N
Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.
378
Shortcuts
10
MY MENU
3
Select a menu to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.
Press the MENU/OK button again to return to the menu selec-
tion screen.
4
Select a menu to be registered next
and press the MENU/OK button. Select
the order of the menus to be regis-
tered and press the MENU/OK button.
SELECT ITEM LOCATION
1 IMAGE SIZE
2 IMAGE QUALITY
SAVEMOVE
5
Repeat Step 4 and register “my menu”.
To exit “my menu” registration, press the DISP/BACK button.
N
“My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
379
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Qbutton.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu o ers di erent options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SET
SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AE
Default
Default
A
A
SHOOTING MODE
I
I
HIGHLIGHT TONE
B
B
ISO
J
SHADOW TONE
C
C
DYNAMIC RANGE
K
COLOR
D
WHITE BALANCE
L
SHARPNESS
E
HIGH ISO NR
M
SELF-TIMER
F
IMAGE SIZE
N
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
G
G
IMAGE QUALITY
O
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
H
H
FILM SIMULATION
P
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B
–
P
, which can be changed.
380
Shortcuts
10
Movie recording
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SET
PROGRAM AE
SHOOTING MODE
Default
Default
A
A
SHOOTING MODE
I
I
FILM SIMULATION
B
B
SHUTTER SPEED
J
DYNAMIC RANGE
C
C
IMAGE FORMAT
K
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
D
WHITE BALANCE
L
F IS MODE
E
APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
M
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
F
MOVIE ISO
N
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
G
G
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/
ASPECT RATIO
O
BIT RATE
H
H
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)
P
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B
–
P
, which can be changed.
381
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Viewing and Changing Settings
1
Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
highlight items and rotate the rear
command dial to change.
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SET
SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AE
N
To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.
3
Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
N
•
The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
•
Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button
(P 385).
•
To disable the Q(quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING> Q BUTTON SETTING.
382
Shortcuts
10
Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:
1
Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.
N
The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photogra-
phy and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.
2
The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick
(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and
press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N
The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
383
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHENk SELECTED)
•
HIGHLIGHT TONE
•
SHADOW TONE
•
COLOR
•
SHARPNESS
•
CLARITY
•
HIGH ISO NR
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
•
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
•
MF ASSIST
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
SELF-TIMER
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
ISO
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
FLASH COMPENSATION
•
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
•
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
•
EVF/LCD COLOR
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
384
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Movies)
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHENk SELECTED)
•
HIGHLIGHT TONE
•
SHADOW TONE
•
COLOR
•
SHARPNESS
•
HIGH ISO NR
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
•
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
•
MF ASSIST
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
MOVIE ISO
•
IMAGE FORMAT
•
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
•
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
•
BIT RATE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F SELF-TIMER
•
MOVIE AF MODE
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
•
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
•
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
•
EVF/LCD COLOR
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
385
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the se-
lected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
AFON button
AFON button AF-ON
B
Center of rear command dial
Center of rear command dial FOCUS CHECK
C
Q (quick menu) button
Q (quick menu) button QUICK MENU
D
AEL (exposure lock) button
AEL (exposure lock) button AE LOCK ONLY
386
Shortcuts
10
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
Fn1 button
Fn1 button FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
B
Fn2 button
Fn2 button SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
C
Fn3 button
Fn3 button EXPO. COMP.
D
Fn4 button
Fn4 button SUB MONITOR MODE
E
Fn5 button
Fn5 button PERFORMANCE
F
Fn6 button
Fn6 button ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
387
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING op-
tion in the setup menu.
•
EXPO. COMP.
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
MF ASSIST ON/OFF
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO
•
IS MODE
•
35mm FORMAT MODE
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F SELF-TIMER
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
•
SUB MONITOR MODE
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
•
COMMAND DIAL LOCK
•
AE LOCK ONLY
•
AF LOCK ONLY
•
AE/AF LOCK
388
Shortcuts
10
•
AF-ON
•
AWB LOCK ONLY
•
LOCK SETTING
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
389
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-
ed ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test- re the
ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling ash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock ash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 175).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been as-
signed can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
position C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button a
second time restores the previous settings.
390
Shortcuts
10
Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N
Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for DBUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION.
Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the di erent gestures are:
Touch-Function Gestures
Touch-Function Gestures
Default
Default
A
T-Fn1 ( ick up)
T-Fn1 ( ick up) HISTOGRAM
B
T-Fn2 ( ick left)
T-Fn2 ( ick left) FILM SIMULATION
C
T-Fn3 ( ick right)
T-Fn3 ( ick right) WHITE BALANCE
D
T-Fn4 ( ick down)
T-Fn4 ( ick down) SHUTTER TYPE
391
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected us-
ing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
MF ASSIST ON/OFF
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO
•
IS MODE
•
35mm FORMAT MODE
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F SELF-TIMER
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
•
SUB MONITOR MODE
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL
MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
•
COMMAND DIAL LOCK
•
LOCK SETTING
392
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
N
To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
393
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories
394
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.
Lens Parts
A
Lens hood
B
Mounting marks
C
Focus ring
D
Aperture ring lock release
E
Mounting marks (focal length)
F
Aperture ring
G
Lens signal contacts
H
Front lens cap
I
Rear lens cap
N
A GF63mmF2.8 R WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
395
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
Lens Care
•
Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fuji lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning uid has been applied.
•
Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.
O
Lens caps may di er from those shown.
Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front
lens element.
396
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
Aperture Rings
In modes A(aperture-priority AE) and M(manual), you can choose
the aperture (f-number) by rotating the lens aperture ring.
Aperture ring
lock release
Aperture ring
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
C (
C (
)
)
With the aperture ring in the C or A position, you can choose
the aperture (f-number) by rotating the camera command
dial.
A (
A (
)
)
Other values (
Other values (
)
)
Set aperture to the selected value.
N
To select C or A, or to select another value after selecting C or A, press the
aperture ring lock release while rotating the aperture ring.
T/S Lenses
View the shift amount or rotate amount
of lenses on the EVF or LCD (P 25).
The shift and rotate amounts are dis-
played in increments of 0.5 mm and 3°,
respectively.
N
The shift amount and rotate amount are also recorded to the EXIF data
of images that have been taken.
397
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
View nder Tilt Adapters
The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the view-
nder left or right ±45° or up or down between 0° and 90°.
A
Hot shoe
B
Tilt lock knob
C
Adapter lock release
D
Horizontal swivel lock
E
Connectors
F
Connector cover
G
Hot shoe cover
398
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Attaching the EVF-TL1
Slide the EVF-TL1 onto the camera hot
shoe and then attach the EVF-GFX3 elec-
tronic view nder.
N
Remove the hot shoe covers from the camera and EVF-TL1 before at-
taching the adapter and view nder.
Removing the EVF-TL1
Remove the view nder and then, keeping the
lock releases (
A
) pressed, press down on the
front of the adapter (
B
) and slide it from the
camera as shown.
O
Use only one tilt adapter at a time.
399
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
View nder Tilt Adapters
Using the EVF-TL1
Swivel the view nder into the desired position.
Swiveling the Viewfi nder Up or Down
Loosen the tilt lock knob and swivel the
view nder up or down from 0° to 90°.
With the view nder in the desired posi-
tion (
A
), tighten the tilt lock knob (
B
)
to lock the view nder in place.
Swiveling the Viewfi nder Left or Right
Release the horizontal swivel lock as
shown and swivel the view nder left or
right ±45°.
With the view nder in the desired po-
sition (
A
), return the horizontal swivel
lock to the latched position (
B
) to lock
the view nder in place.
400
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Use optional external ash units for ash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used
at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed, while
others can function as commanders controlling remote
units via optical wireless ash control.
O
You may be unable to test- re the ash in some circumstances, for ex-
ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected
for F FLASH SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING>
FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye re-
moval minimizes “red-eye” caused when light from the ash is re ected
from the subject’s retinas.
401
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Flash Settings
1
Connect the unit to the camera.
2
In shooting mode, select FLASH
FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH
SETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the ash unit.
EXIT
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
TTL-LOCK MODE
RED EYE REMOVAL
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
FLASH SETTING
Menu
Menu
Description
Description
P
P
SYNC
TERMINAL
Displayed when no compatible fl ash unit is connected or
if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only
the X-contact on the hot shoe.
402
SHOE MOUNT
FLASH
Displayed when an optional fl ash unit is mounted on the
hot shoe and turned on.
403
COMMANDER
(OPTICAL)
Displayed if an optional fl ash unit functioning as a com-
mander for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control is
connected and turned on.
406
N
SYNC TERMINAL will be also displayed if an incompatible ash
unit or no ash unit is connected.
3
Highlight items using the focus stick
(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-
mand dial to change the highlighted
setting.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
4
Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into e ect.
402
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible ash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or
uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SYNC TERMINAL
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
Choose from the following options:
•
M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long fl ashes or has a slow response time.
•
D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
B
Sync
Choose whether the fl ash is timed to fi re immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect ash units
that require a sync cable.
403
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted ash unit is attached and turned on.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
The fl ash control mode selected with the fl ash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-
able vary with the fl ash.
•
TTL: TTL mode. Adjust fl ash compensation (
B
).
•
M: The fl ash fi res at the selected output regardless of subject
brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (
B
).
•
MULTI: Repeating fl ash. Compatible shoe-mounted fl ash
units will fi re multiple times with each shot.
•
D (OFF): The fl ash does not fi re. Some fl ash units can be
turned off from the camera.
404
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
B
Flash compensation/
output
The options available vary with fl ash control mode.
•
TTL: Adjust fl ash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the fl ash control system are exceed-
ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-
ed value is added to the value selected with the fl ash unit.
•
M/MULTI: Adjust fl ash output (compatible units only).
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the fl ash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
C
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possible;
fl ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
405
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
D
Sync
Control fl ash timing.
•
H (1ST CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately after the shut-
ter opens (generally the best choice).
•
I (2ND CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately before the
shutter closes.
•
R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for fl ash control mode.
Note: Horizontal bands may appear in pictures taken using
AUTO FP(HSS) at some shutter speeds.
E
Zoom
The angle of illumination (fl ash coverage) for units that sup-
port fl ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
F
Lighting
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
•
J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
•
K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
•
L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
G
LED light
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-
raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (
M
/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (
N
/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-
light and an AF-assist illuminator (
O
/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
G
Number of ashes
*
Choose the number of times the fl ash fi res each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
H
Frequency
*
Choose the frequency at which the fl ash fi res in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of fl ash control system are exceeded.
406
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control.
ADJUST
END
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
MODE
Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control o ers a choice of
four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote ash units. Sepa-
rate channels can be used for di erent ash systems or to pre-
vent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The ash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and ash mode
and ash level adjusted separately for
each group.
BB
A
C
407
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
(group A)
Choose fl ash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
•
TTL: The units in the group fi re in TTL mode. Flash com-
pensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
•
TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percent-
age of the other and adjust overall fl ash compensation
for both groups.
•
M: In mode M, the units in the group fi re at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
•
MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating fl ash mode. All units will fi re
multiple times with each shot.
•
D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fi re.
B
Flash control mode
(group B)
C
Flash control mode
(group C)
D
Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Adjust fl ash level for the selected group according to
option selected for fl ash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the fl ash control
system are exceeded.
•
TTL: Adjust fl ash compensation.
•
M/MULTI: Adjust fl ash output.
•
TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
adjust overall fl ash compensation.
E
Flash compensation/
output (group B)
F
Flash compensation/
output (group C)
408
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
G
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-
lected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
picon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo
is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possi-
ble; fl ash level is adjusted according to subject bright-
ness. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
H
Sync
Control fl ash timing.
•
H (1ST CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
•
I (2ND CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately before the
shutter closes.
•
R
(AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for fl ash control mode.
I
Zoom
The angle of illumination (fl ash coverage) for units that sup-
port fl ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
J
Lighting
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
•
J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-
ducing coverage.
•
K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
•
L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.
409
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
K
Commander
Choose the group for units functioning as a command-
er for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clip-
on fl ash units that support Fujifi lm optical wireless remote
fl ash control.
•
Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
•
Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
•
Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
•
OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not aff ect the fi nal picture.
K
Number of ashes
Choose the number of times the fl ash fi res each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
L
Channel
Choose the channel used by the commander for commu-
nication with the remote fl ash units. Separate channels
can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent in-
terference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
L
Frequency
Choose the frequency at which the fl ash fi res in MULTI
mode.
410
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
The VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip can be used to sup-
plement the camera battery or when holding the camera
rotated to take pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
A
Fn1 button
B
Fn2 button
C
Fn3 button
D
Shutter button
E
Control lock
F
Front command dial
G
Fn5 button
H
Fn6 button
I
Lock screw knob
J
Tripod socket
K
Eyelet for camera strap
L
Connector cover
M
Lock screw
N
Serial number plate
O
Hanging hook
P
Compartment for connector cover
supplied with camera
Q
AFON button
R
Rear command dial
S
Focus stick (focus lever)
T
Q (quick menu) button
U
AEL (exposure lock) button
V
Indicator lamps
W
Battery tray
X
Battery-chamber cover latch
Y
Connector
N
All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on
the camera.
411
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip
N
Check that the camera is o before attaching or removing the vertical
battery grip.
1
Remove the connector cover.
Remove the vertical battery grip connector cover from the
camera (A) and the connector cover from the vertical battery
grip (B).
(A) (B)
N
The vertical battery grip connector cover of the camera (A) can
be placed in the compartment for the connector cover. Store the
connector cover of the vertical battery grip (B) so that is not lost
after removal.
2
Attach the vertical battery grip to the camera.
While hooking the hanging hook in the hole to hook vertical
battery grip on the camera (
A
), attach the vertical battery
grip to the camera (
B
).
Hanging hook
Hole to hook Vertical Battery
Grip
412
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
3
Rotate the lock screw knob to secure the vertical battery grip.
O
•
Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip.
•
Do not touch the contacts.
•
After removing the grip, replace the vertical battery grip connector
cover (A) and connector cover (B).
•
The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en-
try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter.
Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that the
battery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed.
413
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
Inserting and Removing Batteries
Insert the batteries as shown.
The batteries can be removed as shown.
N
•
Be sure the camera is o before exchanging batteries.
•
Use only NP-W235 batteries.
414
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Battery Level
When a vertical battery grip is connected, the
camera battery level display shows the camera
battery level and the level of the batteries in-
serted in the VG-GFX100II.
•
The display shows the level of inserted batteries only.
•
When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the
VG-GFX100II, the batteries will be used in the following order:
A
The left grip battery (L)
B
The right grip battery (R)
C
The camera battery
415
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
Charging the Batteries
The batteries in the vertical battery grip
will charge when the grip is attached to
a camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ
AC adapter via a USB cable.
The indicator lamps will light green while
the battery charges; the lamp on the left
shows the status of the left battery, the
lamp on the right the status of the right
battery.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Battery status
Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Battery fault
O
•
All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about
330minutes.
•
Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45W or above
reduces charging times to as little as 180minutes.
•
The batteries will not charge while the camera is on.
•
For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 50) and “The
Battery and Power Supply” (P 430).
416
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Cooling Fans
Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer
periods of non-stop movie recording.
Attaching a Cooling Fan
Open the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan.
O
Turn the camera o before attaching or removing the fan.
1
Open the monitor.
2
Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the
fan connector cap.
After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach
it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B)
in a safe place.
(A)
(A)
(B)
417
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Cooling Fans
3
Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws and
connectors are correctly aligned.
4
Tighten the screws.
N
The cooling fan may fall o if the screws are not su ciently tightened.
418
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Cooling Fans
Using the Fan
Fan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING>
xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING>
xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie
menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan o .
O
•
At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies re-
corded with the camera.
•
Depending on the LCD orientation, the EVF turns o , and the LCD
only turns on.
419
Technical Notes
420
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
The following accessories are available from Fuji lm.
For the
latest information on the accessories available in your re-
gion, check with your local Fuji lm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be pur-
chased as required.
Dual battery chargers
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At
+25°C/+77°F, the batteries will charge in about 200minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150minutes.
FUJINON lenses
FUJINON lenses
GF-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM G-mount.
Vertical battery grips
Vertical battery grips
VG-GFX100II: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 410).
Tilt adapters
Tilt adapters
EVF-TL1: This adapter lets you swivel the viewfi nder left or right ±45° or up or
down between 0° and 90° to take shots from diff erent angles.
Eye cups
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfi nder eyecups to prevent light
leaking into the viewfi nder window.
Mount adapters
Mount adapters
H MOUNT ADAPTER G: This mount adapter allows the camera to be used with SUPEREBC
FUJINON accessories for the GX645AF, giving you the use of one additional telecon-
verter and nine diff erent lenses.
Macro extension tubes
Macro extension tubes
MCEX-18G WR/MCEX-45G WR: Mount this adapter between the lens and the camera
body for macro photography with large reproduction ratios.
View camera adapters
View camera adapters
VIEW CAMERA ADAPTER G: This adapter is for use with lenses for older FUJINON large-for-
mat cameras, including lenses in the CM FUJINON series.
421
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
Shoe-mounted ash units
Shoe-mounted ash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL fl ash control, this clip-on fl ash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the fl ash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifi lm optical wireless fl ash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote fl ash unit for remote wireless
fl ash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 fl ash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL fl ash control, this clip-on fl ash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the fl ash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote fl ash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless com-
mander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS
*
wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless fl ash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on fl ash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-42: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL fl ash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL fl ash control.
EF-20: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL fl ash control (manual fl ash control is not supported).
Cooling fans
Cooling fans
FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 416).
Remote releases
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time
exposure. The RR-100 has a connector with a diameter of 2.5 mm; a third-party
⌀2.5mm to 3.5 mm adapter is required for connection to the camera.
Stereo microphones
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
422
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
Grip belts
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip.
Body caps
Body caps
BCP-002: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.
instax SHARE printers
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax fi lm.
423
Technical Notes
12
Software and Services for Use with Your
Camera
The camera can be used with the following software and
services. For the latest information on software available
from Fuji lm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conver-
sion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fuji lm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converter-
ex-powered-by-silkypix/
N
•
“RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
•
For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-
powered-by-silkypix/
424
Technical Notes
12
Capture One Express for Fuji lm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into oth-
er formats. Capture One Express for Fuji lm is available free of
charge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
N
Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.
Capture One for Fuji lm
Capture One for Fuji lm work ow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pic-
tures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
N
Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)
A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.
•
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroom-
tether-plugin/
FUJIFILM X Acquire
This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a speci ed folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/
425
Technical Notes
12
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW les to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner
Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift
multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 121).
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Send still images and movies directly from the camera to the
Frame.io platform via a network.
https://frame.io/
426
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
•
Read Instructions
Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.
•
Retain Instructions
Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
•
Heed Warnings
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
•
Follow Instructions
Follow Instructions: All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Installation
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-
bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-
pany. For video products intended to operate from battery
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fi t into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fi t, contact your electri-
cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the polarized plug.
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fi t into a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-
place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the grounding type plug.
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fi re or electric shock.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface.
This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-
lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been ad-
hered to. This video product should never be placed near or
over a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-
ter—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-
tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the appliance.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-
turer.
An appliance and cart combination
should be moved with care. Quick
stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Antennas
Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-
tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-
ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
Ground Clamp
t
Electric Service Equipment
e Equipment
A
A
ntenn
a
Le
ad
in
W
ir
e
A
A
Antenna
An
Discharge Unit
D
(NEC SECTION
N
810-20)
8
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding Electrode
System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Groun
d
in
g
Con
d
uctors
(
NE
C
SECTION 810-21
)
427
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
Use
Use
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into
this video product through openings as they may touch dan-
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in
a fi re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the
video product.
Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
power-line surges.
Service
Service
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualifi ed service personnel.
Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualifi ed service person-
nel under the following conditions:
•
When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
•
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
video product.
•
If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
•
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
been damaged.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-
ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualifi ed technician to restore
the video product to its normal operation.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance — this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-
ifi ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
fi re, electric shock or other hazards.
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this video product, ask the service technician to perform
safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-
er operating condition.
Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes
•
Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.
•
After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
WARNING
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious in-
jury can result if the information is ignored.
CAUTION
CAUTION
This icon indicates that personal injury or
material damage can result if the informa-
tion is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information re-
quires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-
resent the following:
AC
DC
Class II equipment (The construction of the product
is double-insulated.)
WARNING
WARNING
Unplug
from power
socket
If a problem arises, turn the camera o , remove the
If a problem arises, turn the camera o , remove the
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
power adapter.
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fi re or
electric shock. Contact your Fujifi lm dealer.
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
era or connecting cables.
era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid nd its way into the camera or connecting
Should liquid nd its way into the camera or connecting
cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, discon-
cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, discon-
nect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
nect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
adapter.
adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a
fi re or electric shock. Contact your Fujifi lm dealer.
428
Technical Notes
12
WARNING
WARNING
Do not use in
the bathroom
or shower
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower.
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
can cause a fi re or electric shock.
Do not
disassemble
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-
er open the case).
er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fi re or electric shock.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts.
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-
tion cord.
tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and
cause a fi re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujifi lm dealer. Do not use cables with
bent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not
use shooting, playback, or any other operations
of the camera while operating a car or other ve-
hicle. This can result in you falling down or being
involved in a traffi c accident. If you take pictures
while walking, pay attention to your surroundings.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
thunderstorm.
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as speci ed.
Do not use the battery except as speci ed. Load the
battery as shown by the indicator.
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could result
in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or
leaking, causing fi re, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters speci ed for
Use only batteries or AC power adapters speci ed for
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown.
power supply voltage shown. The use of other power
sources can cause a fi re.
WARNING
WARNING
If the battery leaks and uid gets in contact with your
If the battery leaks and uid gets in contact with your
eyes, skin or clothing, ush the a ected area with clean
eyes, skin or clothing, ush the a ected area with clean
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
those speci ed here.
those speci ed here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with the
camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a ash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
Using a ash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment.
visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-
tographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-
longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suff er from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
similar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of ammable objects, explo-
Do not use in the presence of ammable objects, explo-
sive gases, or dust.
sive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
battery terminals with insulation tape.
battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
battery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
out of the reach of small children.
out of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-
ments that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,
causing strangulation, and the fl ash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.
429
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations a ected by oil
Do not use this camera in locations a ected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust.
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fi re
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures.
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-
tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fi re.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
still connected.
still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a fi re or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-
er in a cloth or blanket.
er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a fi re.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not t
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not t
securely into the outlet.
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-
caution could result in fi re or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-
use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-
tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a fi re or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket.
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fi re.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your nger to hold it and
out of the slot too quickly. Use your nger to hold it and
gently release the card.
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting.
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera.
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fi re or electric shock. Contact your Fujifi lm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
tions.
tions.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or
the like.
the like.
430
Technical Notes
12
The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read
the appropriate sections.
WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or
cause leakage, overheating, fi re, or explosion.
Li-ion Batteries
Li-ion Batteries
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion
battery.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
L
L
Notes on the Battery
Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use.
Charge the battery one or two days before use.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
not in use.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary,
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and
insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating
devices.
L
L
Charging the Battery
Charging the Battery
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below
+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to
charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
L
L
Battery Life
Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will
hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-
vice life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may fi nd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a
charge. Charge the battery regularly.
L
L
Storage
Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-
mately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-
move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.
L
L
Cautions: Handling the Battery
Cautions: Handling the Battery
•
Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-
laces or hairpins.
•
Do not expose to fl ame or heat.
•
Do not disassemble or modify.
•
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
•
Use with designated chargers only.
•
Dispose of used batteries promptly.
•
Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
•
Do not expose to water.
•
Keep the terminals clean.
•
The battery and camera body may become warm to the
touch after extended use. This is normal.
L
Caution:
Disposal
Disposal
Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
AC Power Adapters
AC Power Adapters
•
The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
•
Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
•
Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-
connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
•
Do not disassemble.
•
Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
•
Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
•
The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
use. This is normal.
•
If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate
the receiving antenna.
431
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Using the Camera
•
Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources,
including artifi cial light sources or natural light sources
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
•
Strong sunlight focused through the viewfi nder may dam-
age the panel of electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Do not aim
the electronic viewfi nder at the sun.
Take Test Shots
Take Test Shots
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
liability for damages or lost profi ts incurred as a result of
product malfunction.
Notes on Copyright
Notes on Copyright
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked
to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
Handling
Handling
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
being recorded.
Liquid Crystal
Liquid Crystal
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action
indicated should any of the following situations arise:
•
If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and
running water.
•
If liquid crystal enters your eyes, fl ush the aff ected eye with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
•
If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly
with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-
iting, then seek medical assistance.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and
images recorded with the product are unaff ected.
Trademark Information
Trademark Information
Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-
wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Camera to
Cloud, Frame.io, Lightroom and Photoshop are either regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States
and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and
Wi-Fi Protected Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of
such marks by Fujifi lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC
logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark
of the CFA (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a
trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPO-
RATED. USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks
of USB Implementers Forum. AirGlu™ is a trademark or regis-
tered trademark of Atomos. All other trade names mentioned
in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
Electrical Interference
Electrical Interference
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-
ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
Color Television Systems
Color Television Systems
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-
vision telecasting specifi cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
television system adopted mainly in European countries and
China.
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera fi le format in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-
or reproduction during printing.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-
ware without the permission of the applicable governing
bodies is prohibited.
Lenses and Other Accessories
•
Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
•
Fujifi lm will not be held liable for performance issues or
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.
432
Technical Notes
12
NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-
lowing measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and re-
ceiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diff erent
from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifi cations not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-
junction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-
ernment’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Government.
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specifi c Absorption Rate, or SAR.
The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certifi ed
power level in all tested frequency bands.
Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
this product must be used with a Fujifi lm-specifi ed fer-
rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
the product you have purchased. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
recycle this battery.
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-
vision 2, Chapter4, Article 4, Appliance Ef-
fi ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609
433
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
For Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-
dian ICES-003.
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-
terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada.
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientifi c evi-
dence does not show that any health problems are asso-
ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health
eff ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does
not produce heating eff ects causes no known adverse health
eff ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological eff ects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological eff ects might occur, but such fi ndings
have not been confi rmed by additional research. GFX100 II
has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation ex-
posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-
nel mobile satellite systems.
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
packaging indicates that this product shall not
be treated as household waste. Instead it should
be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-
vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
as household waste.
If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-
mulators please dispose these separately according to your
local requirements.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-
sources. For more detailed information about recycling this
product, please contact your local city offi ce, your household
waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-
thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Storage and Use
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
•
exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
•
very humid or extremely dusty
•
exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
•
extremely cold
•
subject to strong vibration
•
exposed to strong magnetic fi elds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
•
in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
•
next to rubber or vinyl products
434
Technical Notes
12
Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
•
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
•
RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF230001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
•
Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 11.81 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 13.51 dBm
Bluetooth: 3.20 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
•
Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device
Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device
.
. Fujifi lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than off ered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
•
Use only in the country in which the device was purchased.
Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifi lm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
•
Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference.
Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band.
•
The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
•
Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-
tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
-
Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
-
Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
-
Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
•
The following may be punishable by law:
The following may be punishable by law:
-
Disassembly or modifi cation or this device
-
Removal of device certifi cation labels
•
This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters.
This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-
ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
•
To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions.
To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confi rm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the aff ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifi lm representative.
435
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
•
Do not use this device on board an aircraft.
Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off . This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
•
Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Speci c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
Speci c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certifi ed output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.119 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.
U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifi lm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany
436
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes
•
Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
•
After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
WARNING
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious
injury can result if the information is ig-
nored.
CAUTION
CAUTION
This icon indicates that personal injury or
material damage can result if the informa-
tion is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information re-
quires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
WARNING
WARNING
Do not
immerse
Do not immerse in or expose to water.
Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution can cause a fi re or electric
shock.
Do not
disassemble
Do not disassemble (do not open the case).
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause fi re, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts.
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
nders.
nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fi re or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day.
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fi re.
Keep out of the reach of small children.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects.
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fi re
or burns.
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
store out of direct sunlight.
store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the
lens can cause fi re or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod.
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-
jects, causing injury.
437
Technical Notes
12
Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-
tly with a piece of Fuji lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning uid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-
age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING> SENSOR
CLEANING.
438
Technical Notes
12
Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING>
SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-
scribed below.
O
Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.
1
Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.
N
Do not use a brush or blower brush.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.
2
Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-
peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.
3
Replace the body cap or lens.
439
Technical Notes
12
Firmware Updates
Updates to product rmware may result in changes not
described in the manual. For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Checking the Firmware Version
O
The camera will only display the rmware version if a memory card is
inserted.
1
Turn the camera o and check that a memory card is inserted.
2
Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The
current rmware version will be displayed; check the rm-
ware version.
3
Turn the camera o .
N
To view the rmware version or update rmware for optional acces-
sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted ash units, and
mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.
440
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t nd the solution here, con-
tact your local Fuji lm distributor.
Power and Battery
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera does not
turn on.
•
The battery was not charged before rst use: The battery is not
charged at shipment. Charge the battery before fi rst use
(P 50).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
•
The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-
entation (P 43).
•
The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 43).
The monitor does not
turn on.
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
The battery runs down
quickly.
•
The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-
et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-
mediately before taking a picture.
•
There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth.
•
ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 152).
•
The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 336).
441
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera turns o
suddenly.
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
fully-charged spare battery (P 50).
The camera does not
turn o .
The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
(P 10).
Charging does not start.
•
Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged
in (P 50).
•
Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
AC power adapter (P 50).
•
The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with
a new battery.
Charging does not start
(USB).
•
Insert the camera battery (P 43).
•
Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 43).
•
Confi rm that the camera is connected to the computer
(P 53).
•
If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB ca-
ble (P 53).
Charging does not start
(battery charger).
•
Insert the battery.
•
Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
•
The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow. Charge the battery at room temperature.
442
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
does not charge.
•
There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 43).
•
The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 336). If the battery still fails to
charge, contact your Fujifi lm dealer (P 420).
The power supply icon is
not displayed.
Confi rm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is se-
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.
Menus and Displays
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Display is not in English.
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING> Qa
(P 58, 335).
443
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Shooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
No picture is taken
when the shutter
button is pressed.
•
The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 45, 224).
•
The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 332).
•
There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
with a soft, dry cloth.
•
The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
(P 45).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
•
The camera has turned o automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 54).
•
You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 360).
Mottling (“noise”)
appears in the monitor
or view nder when
the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaff ected.
The camera does not
focus.
•
The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or man-
ual focus (P 110).
•
The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 99).
444
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
No face is detected.
•
The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 153).
•
The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occu-
pies a larger area of the frame (P 153).
•
The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-
ject to face the camera (P 153).
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is o : Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 153).
•
The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
•
The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
No subject is detected.
•
The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 155).
•
The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 155).
•
OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 155).
•
The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
The ash does not re.
•
The ash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 174).
•
The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 170).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
•
The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 8).
445
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The ash does not fully
light the subject.
•
The subject is not in range of the ash: Position the subject in
range of the fl ash.
•
The ash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
•
Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 78, 82, 464).
Pictures are blurred.
•
The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
•
The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
(P 61).
•
s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-
played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 62).
Pictures are mottled.
•
Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
*
Use pixel
mapping (P 142).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various col-
ors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.
•
The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:
Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 54,
456).
•
A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 54, 456).
446
Technical Notes
12
Playback
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Pictures are grainy.
The pictures were taken with a diff erent make or model of
camera.
Playback zoom is
unavailable.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a diff erent
make or model of camera.
No sound in movie
playback.
•
Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 341).
•
The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
•
The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
Selected pictures are not
deleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Remove protection using the device with which it was
originally applied (P 228).
Pictures remain after
ERASE> ALL FRAMES is
selected.
File numbering is
unexpectedly reset.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 369).
447
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Wired Connections
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The monitor is blank.
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 64).
Both the TV and camera
monitor are blank.
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
EVF ONLY +
EVF ONLY +
E
E
: Put your eye to the viewfi nder. Use
the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 20).
No picture or sound
on TV.
•
The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 64).
•
Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
(P 64).
•
The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-
vision to adjust the volume (P 64).
The computer does not
recognize the camera.
Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected
(P 255).
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
or FUJIFILM X Acquire
fails to correctly detect
the camera.
Check camera settings. If the camera is connected via
USB, be sure 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
is chosen for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
(P 291, 292).
Cannot connect to
iPhones or iPads.
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power (P 254).
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
Con rm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure
for connecting the camera varies with the type of connec-
tor with which the smartphone is equipped (P 252).
448
Technical Notes
12
Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-
tions, visit:
https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
The camera is slow
to connect or upload
pictures to the
smartphone.
Upload fails or is
interrupted.
•
The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer
(P 247).
•
Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-
era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-
less phones (P 247).
Cannot upload images.
•
The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-
phone and camera can connect to only one device at a
time. End the connection and try again (P 247).
•
There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting
again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make
connection diffi cult (P 247).
•
The image was created on another device: The camera may
not be able to upload images created on other devices.
•
The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In
addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in
formats they do not support.
Smartphone will not
display pictures.
Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING>
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF
increases upload times for larger images; in addition,
some phones may not display images over a certain size
(P 322).
449
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Remote Movie Recording
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The remote recording
display does not appear
in the browser.
•
The IP address is incorrect: Enter the correct IP address.
Note that the IP address may change unexpectedly if au-
tomatic IP address assignment is enabled (P 293).
•
The access point for the computer or tablet is not con gured
correctly: Be sure the access point for the computer or
tablet is confi gured correctly (P 293).
•
The camera is not on the same network as the computer or tab-
let: Be sure the camera is connected to the same local-ar-
ea network (LAN) as the computer or tablet (P 293).
•
The camera clock is not set to the correct date: Set the camera
clock to the correct date (day, month, and year).
•
Delete the browser history and/or cache.
The browser is slow
to update the view
through the camera
lens.
•
The connection is not high speed: Be sure both the camera
and the computer or tablet are connected to the network
via Ethernet or high-speed (e.g., 5GHz) wireless.
•
The browser is con gured to prioritize image quality over per-
formance: Select real-time performance for “Display with
Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority” in
the browser remote recording menu (P 309).
450
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The browser does not
display the same menus
or other text as the
camera.
Automatic translation is enabled in the browser: Disable auto-
matic translation.
The computer or tablet
cannot connect to the
camera via HTTPS.
•
The camera root certi cate has not been installed on the com-
puter or tablet: Install the camera root certifi cate on the
computer or tablet (P 298).
•
The camera IP address has changed: The camera root certifi -
cate must be reinstalled on the computer or tablet each
time the camera’s IP address changes.
The computer or
tablet cannot connect
to multiple cameras via
HTTPS.
Root certi cates for some cameras have not been installed on
the computer or tablet: Install root certifi cates for all cameras
(P 298).
A second or subsequent
camera cannot be
connected from a QR
code.
•
SERVER TYPE has not been set to HTTPS: Set SERVER TYPE
to HTTPS and import a root certifi cate.
•
Camera 1 is not selected in the “Choose camera” area: Select
Camera 1 in the “Choose camera” area, and then connect
and use the second or subsequent camera.
•
The browser is not allowed to access the tablet’s camera: Allow
the tablet’s browser to access the camera.
451
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera is unre-
sponsive.
•
Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 43).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
•
The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connec-
tion.
•
The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
to unlock the controls (P 17, 19).
The camera does not
function as expected.
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 43). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujifi lm dealer.
No sound.
Adjust the volume (P 338).
Pressing the Qbutton
does not display the
quick menu.
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 175).
452
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
i (red)
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
spare battery.
j (blinks red)
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery.
s (displayed in red with
red focus frame)
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
picture.
Aperture or shutter
speed displayed in red
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
over- or under-exposed. Use the fl ash for additional light-
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off , remove the lens,
and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
LENS CONTROL ERROR
TURN OFF THE CAMERA
AND TURN ON AGAIN
CARD NOT INITIALIZED
•
The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING> FORMAT.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
453
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
LENS ERROR
Turn the camera off , remove the lens, and check for for-
eign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
CARD ERROR
•
The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-
mat the card.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-
sists, replace the card.
•
Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
PROTECTED CARD The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
BUSY
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
b MEMORY FULL
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
454
Technical Notes
12
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
WRITE ERROR
•
Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
•
Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
•
The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
•
The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
•
The memory card write speed is slow: When recording mov-
ies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
FRAME NO. FULL
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..
455
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
READ ERROR
•
The le is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The fi le
cannot be viewed.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
PROTECTED FRAME
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected
picture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
DPOF FILE ERROR
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-
ry card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF
Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE
Movies cannot be rotated.
456
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE
The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
picture was recorded with a diff erent model of camera.
m CANNOT EXECUTE
p (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
STANDARD
TEMPERATURE LIMIT
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature al-
lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
camera off and wait for it to cool.
p (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
HIGH TEMPER-
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
HOLD CAMERA FOR
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
burns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
p (red)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
LIMIT REACHED
SHUTTING DOWN
The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the cam-
era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pic-
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
457
Technical Notes
12
Errors
If a C or B icon appears in the display, select INFORMATION>
ERROR DESCRIPTION in the network/USB setting menu to
view the error and then take the appropriate action.
Error
Error
Solution
Solution
NOT CONNECTED TO
NETWORK VIA ETHERNET
CABLE
The wired LAN (Ethernet) cable is not connected: Connect the
wired LAN (Ethernet) cable.
NOT CONNECTED TO
NETWORK VIA WIRELESS
LAN
•
No connection to access point: Confi rm that the access point
is on, verify its settings and IP address, and check that
there are no obstructions blocking its signal. If necessary,
move the camera closer to the access point.
•
Camera settings have not been correctly adjusted for connec-
tion to the access point: Check that the password, encryp-
tion type, and SSID match those chosen for the access
point.
IP ADDRESS CANNOT
BE ASSIGNED BY DHCP
SERVER OR THERE IS AN
ISSUE WITH IP ADDRESS
SETTING PLEASE CHECK
SETTINGS
•
No DHCP server: If there is no DHCP server on the network,
enter the IP address and other information manually.
•
The DHCP server is down: Contact the network administra-
tor.
458
Technical Notes
12
Error
Error
Solution
Solution
CANNOT REACH FTP
SERVER OR COMMUNI-
CATE WITH FTP SERVER
PLEASE CHECK SETTINGS
•
Duplicate IP address: Change the camera IP address to en-
sure that it does not duplicate the address of any other
device on the network.
•
Invalid IP address: If the network includes a DHCP server,
select auto address allocation. If IP addresses are assigned
manually, check that the IP address is correct.
•
The DNS server address is incorrect: If you confi gured the
DNS address manually, be sure the information you en-
tered is correct.
•
FTP server settings are incorrect: Check that the server type,
server address, port number, and proxy settings are cor-
rect.
•
The FTP server is down: Contact the network administrator.
LOGIN TO FTP SERVER
HAS FAILED
Incorrect user name or password: Check that you have sup-
plied the correct user name and password.
CANNOT TRANSFER
OR SAVE FILES TO FTP
SERVER
•
FTP server permissions are con gured incorrectly: Check that
you have write access to the FTP server.
•
The FTP server is full: Check the amount of free storage
space remaining on the FTP server.
CA ROOT CERTIFICATE IS
INVALID
The root certi cate has expired: After confi rming that the
camera clock is set to the correct time and date, load an
updated CA root certifi cate.
459
Technical Notes
12
Errors
Error
Error
Solution
Solution
Frame.io DISCONNECTED
•
The Frame.io server may be down: Check that the Frame.io
server is up or try again later.
•
The camera clock is not set to the correct time and date: Set the
camera clock.
•
The network is not con gured correctly: Check the settings of
the connected network.
•
Turn the camera off and then on again.
•
Contact the network administrator.
UNEXPECTED ERROR HAS
OCCURRED
•
Turn the camera off and then on again.
•
Contact the network administrator.
460
Technical Notes
12
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at di erent image sizes. All gures are
approximate; le size varies with the scene recorded, pro-
ducing wide variations in the number of les that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
Capacity
Capacity
T
T
SD/CFexpress memory cards
SD/CFexpress memory cards
64GB
64GB
SUPER FINE
SUPER FINE
FINE
FINE
NORMAL
NORMAL
Photos
Photos
O
O
4
4
∶
∶
3
3
1040 1560 2490
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) 300
RAW
RAW
(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
590
RAW (COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
880
Movies
Movies
*
*
V
V
2160
2160
79 minutes
W
W
1080
1080
79 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.
O
•
The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 72).
•
Depending on the bit rate, shots saved to memory cards with a capacity
of 32 GB or less may be recorded across multiple les without interruption.
The same is true of shots over an hour in length, independent of the bit
rate and memory card capacity.
461
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Model FUJIFILM GFX100 II
Product Number FF230001
E ective pixels Approx. 102 million
Image sensor 43.8 mm× 32.9 mm Bayer array with primary color fi lter
Storage media Fujifi lm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B
memory cards
Memory card slots
•
SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1
•
CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1
File system
•
Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
•
Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compli-
ant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
•
Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
•
Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes
•
Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
•
Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four chan-
nels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)
462
Technical Notes
12
System
Image size
O 4∶3 (11648 × 8736) O 65∶24 (11648 × 4304)
O
3∶2 (
11648 × 7768
)
O 5∶4 (10928 × 8736)
O 16∶9 (11648 × 6552) O 7∶6 (10192 × 8736)
O 1∶1 (8736 × 8736)
P 4∶3 (8256 × 6192) P 65∶24 (8256 × 3048)
P
3∶2 (
8256 × 5504
)
P 5∶4 (7744 × 6192)
P 16∶9 (8256 × 4640) P 7∶6 (7232 × 6192)
P 1∶1 (6192 × 6192)
Q 4∶3 (4000 × 3000) Q 65∶24 (4000 × 1480)
Q
3∶2 (
4000 × 2664
)
Q 5∶4 (3744 × 3000)
Q 16∶9 (4000 × 2248) Q 7∶6 (3504 × 3000)
Q 1∶1 (2992 × 2992)
RAW (11808 × 8754) TIFF (11648 × 8736)
Lens mount FUJIFILM G mount
Sensitivity
•
Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 80 – 12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 40, 25600, 51200, or 102400
•
Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO100 – 12800
in increments of ⁄EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-
alent to ISO 25600
Metering 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation
•
Still pictures: −5EV – +5EV in increments of ⁄EV
•
Movies: −2EV – +2EV in increments of ⁄EV
463
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Shutter speed
•
MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER
⁃ Modes P and A: 30s to ¼ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 60min. to ¼ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60min.
•
ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC,
E-FRONT+ ELECTRONIC
⁃ Modes P and A: 30s to ⁄s
⁃ Modes S and M: 60min. to ⁄s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60min.
O
The shutter speed ranges for continuous mode may
di er from those listed here.
Continuous
Available frame advance rates (JPEG)
Available frame advance rates (JPEG)
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
MODE
MODE
MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONIC
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
CH HIGH SPEED BURST 8.0, 5.0 5.3
*
*
CL LOW SPEED BURST 2.0
* In 35mm FORMAT MODE, the frame rate is 8.7 or 5.8
O
The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.
Focus
•
Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
•
Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
•
Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balance Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sun-
light, shade, daylight fl uorescent, warm white fl uorescent,
cool white fl uorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer
•
Still pictures: Off , 2 sec., 10 sec.
•
Movies: Off , 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
Flash mode
•
MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF
•
SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-
speed sync)
•
RED
EYE
REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
464
Technical Notes
12
System
Hot shoe Provided (supports TTL fl ash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ⁄s
Sync contact X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ⁄s
Sync terminal Provided
Electronic view nder
(EVF)
EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewfi nder (supplied)
LCD monitor
•
Rear monitor: 3.2-in/8.1 cm, 2360k-dot color LCD touch
screen with 3-way tilt
•
Shoulder monitor: 2.09-in/5.31 cm, 219 × 320-dot memory
LCD monitor
Movies
(with stereo sound)
•
Movie size:
7
2.76:1,
2
1.38:1,
V
16:9,
6
17:9,
5
2.35:1,
4
17:9,
3
3:2,
3
16:9, V 16∶9, 1 17∶9,
W 16∶9, W 17∶9
O
The size that can be selected depend on the
IMAGE FORMAT setting.
•
Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
•
Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50
Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
- ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV
4 : 2 : 2)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
High-speed movies
•
Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
•
Frame advance rate: 120P, 100P
465
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector
⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket
⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Remote release connector
⌀3.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector: USB Type-C® USB 10 Gbps
HDMI output HDMI connector (Type A)
LAN connector 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
466
Technical Notes
12
Power supply/other
Power supply NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
•
Battery type: NP-W235
•
Lens: GF63mmF2.8 R WR
•
External ash units: Disabled
•
Shooting mode: Mode P
•
AUTO POWER SAVE: ON
Number of shots
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
LCD
LCD
EVF
EVF
BOOST
1
1
Approx. 500 Approx. 370
NORMAL Approx. 540 Approx. 460
Number of shots (VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip)
Number of shots (VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip)
PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
LCD
LCD
EVF
EVF
BOOST
1
1
Approx. 1360 Approx. 1010
NORMAL Approx. 1470 Approx. 1240
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
a single charge
Mode
Mode
Actual battery life
Actual battery life
of movie capture
of movie capture
Continuance
Continuance
battery life of
battery life of
movie capture
movie capture
V
2
2
Approx. 60minutes Approx. 80minutes
V
3
3
Approx. 60minutes Approx. 90minutes
W
3
3
Approx. 80minutes Approx. 140minutes
High-speed movies
4
4
Approx. 65minutes –
1
EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected PERFORMANCE.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120fps.
CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the fi gures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-
ance will decline at low temperatures.
467
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
Power supply/other
Camera size
(W × H × D)
152.4 mm× 117.4 mm× 98.6 mm (46.5 mm excluding projections,
measured at thinnest part)/6.00 in.× 4.62 in.× 3.88 in. (1.83 in.)
Camera weight Approx. 949 g/33.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight Approx. 1030 g/36.3 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions
•
Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
•
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency
(center frequency)
•
Indonesia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
•
USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
•
European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan, Israel
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency
(center frequency)
2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
468
Technical Notes
12
EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic view nder
Type OLED
Size 0.64-in/1.63 cm
Pixel count Approximately 9.44 million dots
Magni cation 1.00× with 50 mm lens (35 mm format) at infi nity and diop-
ter set to −1.0 m
−1
Diagonal angle of
view
Approximately 47° (horizontal angle of view approximately 38°)
Diopter adjustment −5 to +2 m
−1
Eye point Approximately 21 mm
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
52 mm× 37 mm× 78.9 mm/2.05 in.× 1.46 in.× 3.1 in.
Weight Approx. 91 g/3.2 oz.
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage 7.2 V
Nominal capacity 2350 mAh
Rating capacity 2200 mAh
Operating
temperature
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
38.92 mm× 22.8 mm× 52.26 mm/
1.5 in.× 0.9 in.× 2.1 in.
Weight Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz.
469
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
Address No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Model name AC-5VJ
Rated input 100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Input capacity Max. 50 VA
Rated output DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
Average active e ciency 84.8 %
E ciency at load 10% 84.2 %
No-load power consumption 0.02 W
Operating temperature 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Weight Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.
O
Speci cations and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fuji lm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may di er from that described in this
manual.
470
MEMO
471
MEMO
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com
